Merges trunk HEAD

git-svn-id: https://svn.apache.org/repos/asf/ofbiz/branches/webhelp-2012-12-07@1564402 13f79535-47bb-0310-9956-ffa450edef68
diff --git a/.project b/.project
index fc8c3ae..65828cd 100644
--- a/.project
+++ b/.project
@@ -1,18 +1,18 @@
 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
 <projectDescription>
-    <name>ofbiz</name>
-    <comment></comment>
-    <projects>
-    </projects>
-    <buildSpec>
-        <buildCommand>
-            <name>org.eclipse.jdt.core.javabuilder</name>
-            <arguments>
-            </arguments>
-        </buildCommand>
-    </buildSpec>
-    <natures>
-        <nature>org.eclipse.jdt.groovy.core.groovyNature</nature>
-        <nature>org.eclipse.jdt.core.javanature</nature>
-    </natures>
+	<name>webhelp-2012-12-07</name>
+	<comment></comment>
+	<projects>
+	</projects>
+	<buildSpec>
+		<buildCommand>
+			<name>org.eclipse.jdt.core.javabuilder</name>
+			<arguments>
+			</arguments>
+		</buildCommand>
+	</buildSpec>
+	<natures>
+		<nature>org.eclipse.jdt.groovy.core.groovyNature</nature>
+		<nature>org.eclipse.jdt.core.javanature</nature>
+	</natures>
 </projectDescription>
diff --git a/NOTICE b/NOTICE
index b78fc7f..c4996df 100644
--- a/NOTICE
+++ b/NOTICE
@@ -322,28 +322,28 @@
 
 You are free:
 
-    * to Share — to copy, distribute and transmit the work
-    * to Remix — to adapt the work
+    * to Share — to copy, distribute and transmit the work
+    * to Remix — to adapt the work
     * to make commercial use of the work
 
 Under the following conditions:
 
-    * Attribution — You must attribute the work in the manner specified
+    * Attribution — You must attribute the work in the manner specified
       by the author or licensor (but not in any way that suggests that
       they endorse you or your use of the work).
-    * Waiver — Any of the above conditions can be waived if you get
+    * Waiver — Any of the above conditions can be waived if you get
       permission from the copyright holder.
-    * Public Domain — Where the work or any of its elements is in the 
+    * Public Domain — Where the work or any of its elements is in the 
       public domain under applicable law, that status is in no way 
       affected by the license.   
-    * Other Rights — In no way are any of the following rights affected 
+    * Other Rights — In no way are any of the following rights affected 
       by the license:
         * Your fair dealing or fair use rights, or other applicable copyright 
           exceptions and limitations;      
         * The author's moral rights;
         * Rights other persons may have either in the work itself or in how 
           the work is used, such as publicity or privacy rights.    
-    * Notice — For any reuse or distribution, you must make clear to others 
+    * Notice — For any reuse or distribution, you must make clear to others 
       the license terms of this work. The best way to do this is with a link to 
       this web page. 
 =========================================================================
@@ -355,4 +355,32 @@
 This product includes software developed by Matthew Eernisse (mde@fleegix.org)
 and Open Source Applications Foundation. Licensed under the ASL2
 https://github.com/mde/timezone-js
-=========================================================================
\ No newline at end of file
+=========================================================================
+      
+=========================================================================
+==   Web-based Help from DocBook XML Notice                                                       ==
+=========================================================================
+
+This product includes software developed by Kasun Gajasinghe and David Cramer
+This package is maintained by Kasun Gajasinghe, <kasunbg AT gmail DOT com> 
+and David Cramer, <david AT thingbag DOT net>.
+
+This package also includes the following software written and copyrighted by others:
+    * Files in template/common/jquery are copyrighted by JQuery under the MIT License. 
+      The file jquery.cookie.js Copyright (c) 2006 Klaus Hartl under the MIT license.
+    * Some files in the template/content/search and indexer directories were originally 
+      part of N. Quaine's htmlsearch DITA plugin. The htmlsearch DITA plugin is 
+      available from the files page of the DITA-users yahoogroup. 
+      The htmlsearch plugin was released under a BSD-style license. 
+      See indexer/license.txt for details.
+    * Stemmers from the Snowball project released under a BSD license.
+    * Code from the Apache Lucene search engine provides support for tokenizing Chinese, 
+      Japanese, and Korean content released under the Apache 2.0 license.
+    * Code that provides weighted search results and some other improvements was graciously 
+      donated by SyncRO Soft Ltd., the publishers of the oXygen XML Editor.
+    * Cosmetic improvements provided by OpenStack.
+
+Webhelp for DocBook was first developed as a Google Summer of Code project.  
+** Any stylesheet derived from this Software that is publicly distributed will be identified 
+  with a different name and the version strings in any derived Software will be changed so 
+  that no possibility of confusion between the derived package and this Software will exist. **       
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/accounting_en/accounting.xml b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/accounting_en/accounting.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41a05ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/accounting_en/accounting.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,6497 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!--
+Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one
+or more contributor license agreements.  See the NOTICE file
+distributed with this work for additional information
+regarding copyright ownership.  The ASF licenses this file
+to you under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the
+"License"); you may not use this file except in compliance
+with the License.  You may obtain a copy of the License at
+
+http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
+
+Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
+software distributed under the License is distributed on an
+"AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
+KIND, either express or implied.  See the License for the
+specific language governing permissions and limitations
+under the License.
+-->
+
+
+<book version="5.0" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+      xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+      xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+      xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+      xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+      xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+      xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title>OFBiz Documentation</title>
+
+    <author>
+      <personname><firstname/><surname/></personname>
+
+      <affiliation>
+        <orgname/>
+      </affiliation>
+    </author>
+
+    <pubdate/>
+  </info>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>OFBiz Accounting Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>The Accounting system is organized according to age old and
+    generally accepted principles such as double-entry accounting, a General
+    Ledger with hierarchical accounts, journals and posting of transactions
+    and corresponding entries.</para>
+
+    <para>The structure is primary based on the OMG GL standard and the work
+    that was done on an AR/AP extension of the OMG GL standard. This
+    correlates well with other standards such as ebXML and OAGIS.</para>
+
+    <para>The Accounting entities are structured such that accounts for
+    multiple organizations can be managed. The multiple organizations could be
+    multiple companies, or departments or other organizations within a
+    company. Each Organization can have various GL Accounts associated with it
+    so that it can operate with its own subset of the Master Chart of
+    Accounts.</para>
+
+    <para>Each Organization can also have its own set of Journals for
+    flexibility, even though the use of Journals should be as minimal as
+    possible in favor of allowing the system to automatically create and post
+    transactions based on business events triggered by standard procedures and
+    documents such as purchase and sales orders, invoices, inventory
+    transfers, payments, receipts, and so forth.</para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_main">
+    <title>Accounting Main</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../accounting_en_images/main.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para>This is the default tab for the Accounting Manager application. The
+    screen currently shows links that will display more detailed screens
+    related to Agreements, Billing Accounts, Invoices and Payments.</para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_findInvoices">
+    <title>Invoices</title>
+
+    <para>Sales invoices are generated when customers buy something from your
+    business. You will need to provide a detailed list of the items bought and
+    relevant taxes paid. They are often referred to a 'tax invoices' as they
+    contain information relating to the amount of sales tax (eg VAT / GST)
+    charged on the product or service.</para>
+
+    <para>Purchase invoices are generated by your suppliers when you order
+    something from them. You may send them an order in the form of a Purchase
+    Order. They will then send you the products and an invoice for payment.
+    This invoice is the Purchase Invoice and it will contain details of the
+    items bought plus any taxes.</para>
+
+    <para>Both of these documents are used as proof to various tax authorities
+    (eg Inland Revenue, Customs etc) that the required tax has been charged or
+    collected.</para>
+
+    <para>GENERAL NOTE: The following is an extract from Ian McNulty's
+    documentation work on accounting:</para>
+
+    <para>Invoices are created automatically by the system when certain
+    criteria are met for each item on an order. The criteria will vary
+    depending on the type of product associated with the order item, and the
+    type of order (ie purchase/sales).</para>
+
+    <para>For Sales Orders that include digital goods, an invoice will be
+    created when the order is placed, and that invoice will be for all digital
+    goods in the order. If there are non-digital or physical goods they will
+    go in a separate invoice.</para>
+
+    <para>For Sales Orders that include digital goods, an invoice will be
+    created when the order is placed, and that invoice will be for all digital
+    goods in the order. If there are non-digital or physical goods they will
+    go in a separate invoice.</para>
+
+    <para>For Purchase Orders an invoice will be created from a shipment when
+    the shipment goes into the Received status.</para>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Invoice Roles</title>
+
+      <para>The Invoice Roles screen allows parties with specific roles to be
+      associated with and invoice. If the e-commerce or Sales Order entry
+      route has already been used then the invoice generated will already
+      contain the relevant roles from the various parties.</para>
+
+      <para>For a Sales Order examples of roles will include Bill From
+      Customer, Bill To Customer, End User Customer,Ship To Customer
+      etc.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a party role to an invoice?</title>
+
+        <para>Party roles will automatically be added to an invoices that have
+        been generated as a result of E-Commerce order entry or Sales Order
+        entry. They can also be added be added manually.</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Roles' sub menu</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter or use the lookup to enter the party to be added to
+            the invoice in the 'Party Id' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter or use the lookup to enter the party to be added to
+            the invoice in the 'Party Id' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Date Time Performed' field blank<note>
+                <para>This field is optional and can be entered if required.
+                This field can be used to indicate the date and time this role
+                was performed by the party for this invoice</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Percentage' field blank<note>
+                <para>This field is optional and can be entered if required.
+                If roles are shared then this field can be used to indicate
+                the assigned percentage for this role</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The new role entry will be displayed on the bottom part of
+            the screen <note>
+                <para>If you select a role that is not associated with the
+                party that has been entered an error message will be
+                displayed. To fix it you will need to add the role to the
+                party or choose another party that already has that role
+                associated with it.</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update a party role on an invoice?</title>
+
+        <para>A party role cannot be updated via the current user interface.
+        It can only be removed. If a party role needs to be updated then the
+        entry must be deleted and then re-created.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I remove a party role from an invoice?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the entry that needs to be removed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the entry that needs to be removed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The entry is now removed from the list of invoice
+            roles</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>New Invoice</title>
+
+      <para>This screen allows the user to create a new Sales or Purchase
+      Invoice. Sales Invoices are created when a customer buys something from
+      you. Purchase Invoices are created when you buy something from a
+      supplier.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I create a new Sales invoice?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Create New' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The New Sales Invoice / New Purchase Invoice screen is
+            displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Using the top part of the screen, leave Invoice type with
+            its default of 'Sales Invoice'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave 'Organization Party Id' with its default of
+            'Company'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter or use the lookup to find the 'To Party Id' (eg
+            DemoCustomer)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Create' button in the top part of the
+            screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The invoice header has been created and the default header
+            screen will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Details on the invoice will need to be entered via the other
+            sub menus (eg Items, Time Entries etc)</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I create a new Purchase invoice?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Create New' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The New Sales Invoice / New Purchase Invoice screen is
+            displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Using the bottom part of the screen, leave Invoice type with
+            its default of 'Purchase Invoice'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave 'Organization Party Id' with its default of
+            'Company'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter or use the lookup to find the 'From Party Id' (eg
+            DemoSupplier)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Create' button in the bottom part of the
+            screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The invoice header has been created and the default header
+            screen will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Details on the invoice will need to be entered via the other
+            sub menus (eg Items, Time Entries etc)</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Invoice Send Per Email</title>
+
+      <para>This is used to send a copy of the invoice details to one or more
+      email addresses. The invoice is included as an attachment and the user
+      can add a simple accompanying email message.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I send a copy of an invoice via email?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Send per Email' sub menu</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Send per Email' default screen will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the 'From Email Address'<note>
+                <para>CHECK: Shouldnt this be defaulted from the user
+                login.....????</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'To Email Address' as it is as this will be
+            defaulted using the customer details from the invoice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>If required enter the 'Copy Email address' for anyone that
+            needs to be copied on the email</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Subject' as the default of 'Please find attached
+            invoice'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Other Currency' box blank<note>
+                <para>CHECK: Investigate what effect this has on the
+                email.....</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a short email message in the 'Email Body'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>List Invoice Items</title>
+
+      <para>The Invoice Items screen displays the individual invoice line
+      details and allows the user to update or remove an entry. As each
+      invoice line is created it is allocated a specific sequence (or Item
+      Number) which acts as a unique identifier.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I create a new invoice line item?</title>
+
+        <para>Note that only invoices that have specific statuses can have new
+        line items created. This means that if an invoice has already been
+        paid and processed OFBiz will not allow any amendments to it.</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Items' sub menu for the invoice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Add a new invoice item' screen will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Item No' field blank (as it will be automatically
+            generated)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Invoice Item Type' from the drop down box<note>
+                <para>A typical line using the demo could be 'Invoice Finished
+                Good Item' but ensure that it corresponds with the type of
+                products setup in your catalog</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a description describing what the line item is<note>
+                <para>If you are going to enter a product in the Product Id
+                field from the catalog then leave the 'Description' field
+                blank as it will be used to show the product
+                description</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Override GL Account Id' field blank as it will
+            use the default account based on the Chart of Accounts
+            setup</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Use the lookup or enter a product code in the 'Product Id'
+            field<note>
+                <para>This can be left blank if your invoice line is not
+                related to a product in the catalog</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a number in the 'Quantity' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a 'Unit Price' only if the Product Id field is
+            blank<note>
+                <para>If a Product Id has been entered then leave the 'Unit
+                Price' field blank as it will pick up the product price from
+                the catalog</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Inventory Item' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Product Feature Id' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'UOM' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select 'Yes' for the 'Taxable Flag' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>CHECK: Need to do some tests to see what line item type needs
+          to be used for 'Sales Tax'. I think that it could be 'Invoice Item
+          Sales Tax' since tax is currently calculated at invoice item line
+          level. Also the automatically generated invoices from Order Entry
+          and E-Commerce show taxes at the invoice item line level (think
+          there may be some work going on - see JIRA on to consolidate
+          entries). Need to do some tests using 'Invoice Sales Tax' to see how
+          it works.........</para>
+        </note>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update an invoice line item?</title>
+
+        <para>Not all the fields on the invoice item line can be updated. For
+        example Taxable Flag and Inventory Item cannot be updated. If these
+        fields need to be amended then the invoice item will need to be
+        removed and then re-created.</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Items' sub menu for the invoice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Any existing line items will be displayed in the 'Items'
+            box</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Amend the details in the line item that needs to be updated
+            (eg Quantity, Invoice Item Type, Product Id, Description, Override
+            GL Account, Unit Price)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button displayed at the end of the line
+            item that has been updated</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete an invoice item?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Items' sub menu for the invoice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Any existing line items will be displayed in the 'Items'
+            box</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Remove' button displayed at the end of the line
+            item that needs to be deleted</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Invoice Time Entries</title>
+
+      <para>The Time Entries screen displays any time logged against the
+      invoice. For example these time entries can be from employee or external
+      supplier timesheets that are tracked within OFBiz. is used to track any
+      individual work or billable hours against an invoice.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a new time entry for an invoice?</title>
+
+        <para>There are two options :</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Add time entry to a new invoice and add time entry to an
+            existing invoice.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Add time entry to a new invoice and add time entry to an
+            existing invoice.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update a time entry for an invoice?</title>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>To check if this can only be done via timesheets.</para>
+        </note>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I remove a time entry from an invoice?</title>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>To check if this is done via timesheets</para>
+        </note>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Invoice Applications</title>
+
+      <para>The Invoice Applications sub menu is where payments that have been
+      made (or received) can be linked or allocated to an invoice. The phrase
+      'applying' an amount to an invoice is often used to describe this. The
+      screen is divided into 3 main areas as follows.</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Payments Applied (which shows details of the total amount
+          'Applied' and the total amount 'Open'. Note that 'Open' here means
+          outstanding)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Possible Payments to Apply (which shows all the payments that
+          have been sent from the same party id as the invoice - for a sales
+          invoice this would be the customer party id)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Assign Payment to Invoice (which allows you to manually assign
+          a specific payment id to this invoice)</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>General Ledger accounting transactions are generated during the
+        payment application process but unless your GL is setup with Unapplied
+        Cash and Applied Cash accounts - I'm not sure that there will be any
+        true accounting impact. In the Sales Order process the accounting
+        transaction generated the following GL Accounting transaction is
+        generated for 'Payment Applied' o add some text here.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para>DR 120000 Accounts Receivable / CR 120000 Accounts Receivable -
+      This transaction doesnt really do anything!</para>
+
+      <para>It is used to link payments to invoices. It is also used to
+      allocate which part of a payment is allocated or applied to a specific
+      invoice. This is extremely useful if your customers pay multiple
+      invoices with a single payment.</para>
+
+      <para>Example:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A customer could send a single payment of $1000 that can be
+          used to pay for two invoices (eg $400 and $600)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Using this applications sub menu allows you to allocate part
+          of the $400 to one invoice and the balance ($600) to the other
+          invoice</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para>By default all 'unapplied' payments that have been entered into
+      OFBiz from the customer will be available for selection even if they
+      have not yet been flagged as formally 'Received'. This means that these
+      are payments that have not already been linked to another invoice. If
+      only part of a payment amount has been linked to an invoice then the
+      remaining amount is left available to be allocated to another invoice.
+      Also note that a single invoice could be paid by multiple payments being
+      applied to it.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I apply a payment (or payments) to an invoice?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Applications' sub menu for the invoice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>A list of unapplied payments for the party id will be
+            displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>A list of unapplied payments for the party id will be
+            displayed<note>
+                <para>More than one entry may be used. Also only part of a
+                larger amount may be used)The Payments Applied total at the
+                top of the screen will be updated with the amount selected.
+                Also the Amount Open will be reduced by the amount
+                selected.</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>More than one entry may be used. Also only part of a larger
+            amount may be used)The Payments Applied total at the top of the
+            screen will be updated with the amount selected. Also the Amount
+            Open will be reduced by the amount selected.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>More than one entry may be used. Also only part of a larger
+            amount may be used)The Payments Applied total at the top of the
+            screen will be updated with the amount selected. Also the Amount
+            Open will be reduced by the amount selected.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update an applied payment for an invoice?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Payments that have been applied to an invoice can be
+            updated. This means that you can change the details of the payment
+            transaction or adjust the amount that was applied to the
+            invoice.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Applications' sub menu for the invoice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>A list of payments already applied to the invoice will be
+            displayed in the top part of the screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter or use the lookup to change the 'Payment Id' if
+            required</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the updated amount in the 'Amount to Apply' field if
+            required</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I remove an applied payment (or payments) from an
+        invoice?</title>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>CHECK: It can be done before transaction has been posted to GL
+          but also need to check if its can be done if the transaction has
+          been posted.</para>
+        </note>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Applications' sub menu for the invoice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Applications' sub menu for the invoice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the payment entry that
+            needs to be removed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The entry will be removed and the top part of the screen
+            will be update the 'Payments Applied' total and 'Amount
+            Open'</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Invoice</title>
+
+      <para>The Invoice Header screen is used to view or update details from
+      the invoice header. Examples of the type of information that can be
+      changed are Due Date, Description, Currency.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update the header details for an Invoice?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Header' sub menu and the header details of the
+            invoice will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Update the fields required</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Invoice Overview</title>
+
+      <para>The Invoice Overview screen is used to display the summary of an
+      invoice in a single view. The screen is divided into sections that show
+      various information related to the invoice (eg Roles, Status, Terms,
+      Items, Payments Applied, etc).</para>
+
+      <para>The following options are currently available from this
+      screen:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The following options are currently available from this
+          screen:</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Copy (Create a copy of the current invoice)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>PDF (View a PDF of the current invoice)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>PDF default currency<note>
+              <para>CHECK: Need to see how this is different from just the PDF
+              view......</para>
+            </note></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status to 'Approved' (Change the status of the current invoice
+          to 'Approved)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status to 'Sent' (Change the status of the current invoice to
+          'Sent')</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status to 'Ready' (Change the status of the current invoice to
+          'Ready'.<note>
+              <para>This will create the relevant accounting transactions and
+              post them to the general ledger</para>
+            </note></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status to 'Cancelled' (Change the status of the current
+          invoice to 'Cancelled')</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Save as Template (NOTE TO CHECK: Save the current invoice
+          format as a template)</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Find Invoices</title>
+
+      <para>The default screen is for the Invoices tab is 'Find Invoices'. It
+      is used to locate existing invoices that have been created automatically
+      by the system or manually by the user. It can also be used to create a
+      new Sales or Purchase Invoice.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I view all invoices?</title>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Search' button to view all invoices</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I locate an existing invoice?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the 'Invoice ID' if known</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a word from the invoice description in the
+            'Description' field if known</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the 'Invoice Type' if known</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the 'From Party Id' if known<note>
+                <para>In most cases for a Sales Invoices this will be Company.
+                For Purchase Invoice it will be the supplier party id</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the 'Billing Account Id' if known</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the invoice status in the 'Status Id' field if
+            known</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the 'To Party Id' if known<note>
+                <para>In most cases for a Purchase Invoice this will be
+                company. For Sales Invoices it will be the customer party
+                id</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Search' button to view all invoices</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>All invoices that meet the search criteria will be
+            displayed.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update an invoice?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the invoice using the 'Find Invoices' screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Using the relevant sub menu make the required
+            changes.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete an invoice?</title>
+
+        <para>Invoices cannot be deleted through the user interface. They can
+        only be cancelled (eg if they have been entered or created by
+        mistake). <note>
+            <para>They can probably be deleted using Entity Data Maintenance
+            in the Webtools menu but this is not recommended for 2
+            reasons:<orderedlist>
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>It may cause data integrity problems.</para>
+                </listitem>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>It may cause data integrity problems.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </orderedlist></para>
+          </note></para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_findPayments">
+    <title>Payments</title>
+
+    <para>This feature lets the user locate payments by common
+    criteria.</para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_FindPaymentGroup">
+    <title>Payment Group</title>
+
+    <para>Find payments by group.</para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_FindGatewayResponses">
+    <title>Transactions</title>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_FindPaymentGatewayConfig">
+    <title>Payment Gateway Config</title>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_FindBillingAccount">
+    <title>Billing Accounts</title>
+
+    <para>A billing account is a way of allowing customers to consolidate
+    several invoices into an account that is paid off at a later
+    date.Customers can be allocated a credit limit and orders can be taken up
+    to the value of the credit limit without any payment being made.
+    Statements to the customer can then be generated (eg monthly) and payment
+    is made based on the outstanding amount.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>A billing account does not change the flow of the normal Invoice
+      and Payment processes. It simply allows for a more structured
+      organisation of Invoices and Payments.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>Billing Accounts can be used for the following:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Setting credit limits for customers</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Keeping track of credit available to customer for purchase on
+        account</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Keeping track of payments made in advance <note>
+            <para>Could also use Financial Account for advance payments but
+            need to understand the differences in functionality and
+            process</para>
+          </note></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Keeping track of a subset of payments and invoices for a
+        specific client, i.e. allowing them to have multiple billing
+        accounts.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Allow multiple authorised parties to bill against the same
+        account which one party is responsible for paying (e.g. different
+        offices of the same organisation may have one single account with a
+        supplier to make use of order volume discounts)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Managing and generating customer statements</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Customer specific order tracking</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Accounts Receivable / Debt Management</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Analysis and monitoring customer spending (creditworthiness /
+        discounts / product popularity)</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>A payment that is applied (or matched) to a Billing Account it
+      should still be applied to an invoice. In the case where the payment
+      arrives before the invoice has been generated then once the invoice is
+      generated it should be applied to the payment or payments.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Billing Account Orders</title>
+
+      <para>This sub menu lists the details of any Sales Orders that have been
+      charged to the billing account. A Sales Order is charged to a billing
+      account by selecting the billing account as the Payment Method. <note>
+          <para>The details displayed here in conjunction with the 'Payments'
+          sub menu could also be used to generate a customer statement or
+          account showing details of customer activity during a specified time
+          period.</para>
+        </note></para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Billing Account Payments</title>
+
+      <para>This sub menu allows the creation of a payment that is
+      automatically applied to the billing account.</para>
+
+      <para>It is used when a payment has been received from a customer that
+      is used to pay off the balance (or part balance) of a billing
+      account.</para>
+
+      <para>An example of how this works is similar to a credit card statement
+      where a list of transactions have been incurred over the previous month
+      and one payment is used to settle the outstanding balance.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a payment to a billing account?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Payments' sub menu</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Create Payment' screen is displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter or use the lookup to enter the 'From Party Id' (NOTE:
+            By default this will be the Bill To Party of the Billing
+            Account)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Organisation Party Id' from the drop down
+            box</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Payment Type Id' from the drop down box (NOTE:
+            By default this will be set to 'Customer Deposit')</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Payment Method Type' as 'Billing Account' (NOTE
+            TO CHECK: What happens if you do change this....)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the 'Amount' of the payment</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Create' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>The new entry is displayed at the bottom of the screen.<note>
+            <para>The total amount of the payment will be applied to the
+            Billing Account. This can be verified by going to Accounting /
+            Payments menu and locating the newly created payment. The 'Amount
+            to Apply' column will be zero.</para>
+          </note></para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update a payment for a billing account?</title>
+
+        <para>A payment can be updated for a billing account by amending the
+        amount of the payment that has been applied to the billing account.
+        For example if a payment of $100 has been applied to a billing account
+        it can be amended so that only $75 will be applied and $25 will be
+        available to be applied elsewhere.</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click on the 'Payment Id' of the payment that needs to be
+            removed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Payment Overview' screen is displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button in the 'Payments Applied'
+            box</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Payment Applications' screen is displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the 'Billing Account Id' and 'Amount Applied'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Amend the 'Amount Applied' for the billing account</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button next to the entry that refers to
+            the 'Billing Account Id'</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>A message will be displayed saying that the payment has been
+        removed from the billing account</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete a payment from a billing account?</title>
+
+        <para>A payment can be removed from billing account by removing the
+        link that has applied the payment to the billing account.<orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Click on the 'Payment Id' of the payment that needs to be
+              removed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Payment Overview' screen is displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Update' button in the 'Payments Applied'
+              box</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Payment Applications' screen is displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that refers to
+              the 'Billing Account Id'</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist></para>
+
+        <para>A message will be displayed saying that the payment has been
+        removed from the billing account<note>
+            <para>The above example was done when the payment status was at
+            'Not Paid' - need to test if it still works if the payment status
+            is at 'Received' or 'Confirmed' too.</para>
+          </note></para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Billing Account Invoices</title>
+
+      <para>The Billing Account Find Invoices screen displays by default a
+      list of invoices that have been charged to the billing account.</para>
+
+      <para>Any invoice displayed here means that its invoice amount has been
+      deducted from the billing account credit limit.For example: If the
+      Billing Account Credit Limit is $100 and the there are 2 invoices
+      displayed with amounts $10 and $25 then the available credit for the
+      billing account will be $75.</para>
+
+      <para>The invoice can be at various statues and there is an option to
+      locate an invoice by status.</para>
+
+      <para>It is also used to apply any payments that have been made into the
+      Billing Account to an invoice. A 'Capture' button is displayed next to
+      each invoice displayed that has an amount outstanding.</para>
+
+      <para>Example:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Two invoices are charged to a Billing Account (Invoice A $10
+          and Invoice B $25)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A payment of $17 has been paid into the Billing Account</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the Capture button is pressed for the invoice A then $10 of
+          the $17 payment will be applied to this invoice and a new payment
+          transaction of $7 will be created and available to apply to a
+          different invoice</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I locate an invoice by status?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Invoices' sub menu</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Use the drop down box to select the 'Status Id' for the
+            invoice required</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>A list of invoices with the required status will be
+        displayed</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I capture a payment for an invoice?</title>
+
+        <para><important>
+            <para>In order for this to work a payment needs to have been made
+            to the billing account that has not been completely applied to any
+            other invoices. Payments to a billing account can be done via the
+            'Payments' sub menu for the billing account or by using Accounting
+            / Payments menu.</para>
+          </important></para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Invoices' sub menu</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the invoice required <note>
+                <para>The 'Amount to Apply' is the same as the 'Total'
+                column</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Capture' button <note>
+                <para>The 'Amount to Apply' is different to the 'Total'
+                column</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>The 'Capture' button is no longer displayed next to the invoice
+        and an additional payments transaction will be created for any
+        difference between the invoice total and the amount paid (Eg Invoice
+        Total $100, Payment Amount $125, the new payment transaction amount
+        will be $25)<note>
+            <para>The above example assumes that the payment available will
+            cover the total amount outstanding for the invoice</para>
+          </note></para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title/>
+
+        <para/>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Billing Account Terms</title>
+
+      <para>This sub menu allows terms to be associated with a billing
+      account. Currently these can be the following:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>payment terms (discounted if paid within specified
+          days)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>payment terms (due on a specified day per month)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>payment terms (net days)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>penalty terms (late fee)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>penalty terms (collection agency fee)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>miscellaneous (non returnable sales item)</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>There is an overlap here with the terms that can be specified in
+        an agreement. Would a billing account party also have an agreement for
+        payment terms...? .</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add terms to a billing account?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Terms' sub menu</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select a 'Term Type' from the drop down box (eg. Payment net
+            days)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'UOM' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a number in the 'Term Value' field (eg. 30 which would
+            mean '30 days' when related to 'Payment net days')</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>The term is displayed in the top part of the screen</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update terms for a billing account?</title>
+
+        <para>Select the 'Terms' sub menu<orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Edit' button next to the entry that needs to be
+              amended</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The details are displayed in the 'Edit Billing Account
+              Terms' box</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Update the 'Term Type', 'UOM' or 'Term Value' as
+              required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist></para>
+
+        <para>The updated term is displayed in the top part of the
+        screen</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I remove terms from a billing account?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Terms' sub menu</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Delete' button next to the entry that needs to be
+            removed</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Billing Account Roles</title>
+
+      <para>This sub menu allows parties with specific roles to be associated
+      with to a Billing Account. Roles allows you to specify a party
+      role.</para>
+
+      <para>It is used to specify which party should be billed for the billing
+      account. It can be used as follows:<itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Simple billing account for a single party</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>More complex billing account where multiple parties (eg
+            company subsidiaries) charge invoices to the billing account but a
+            different party (eg head office) will pay the account</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist></para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a party role to a billing account?</title>
+
+        <para>Select the 'Roles' sub menu</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter or use the lookup to select the 'Party Id'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Role Type Id' from the drop down box (eg Bill To
+            Customer)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'From Date' blank (NOTE: If left blank it will
+            default to the current date and time)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Thru Date' blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>The new party role is displayed at the bottom of the
+        screen</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update a party role for a billing account?</title>
+
+        <para>The only field that can be updated for a party role is the 'Thru
+        Date'. If any other details need to be amended then the entry will
+        need to be deleted and then recreated.</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Roles' sub menu</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the entry that needs to be amended</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter or use the lookup to enter the 'Thru Date'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button for the entry</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete a party role from a billing account?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the entry that needs to be deleted</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Delete' button next to the entry</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The entry will be removed from the bottom of the
+            screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Billing Account</title>
+
+      <para>The 'Account' sub menu is used to enter the basic details required
+      for setting up a new billing account or editing an existing one.</para>
+
+      <para>It can be used to create or update the following details for a
+      Billing Account:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Billing Account Identification</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party to be Billed</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Billing Account Limit (NOTE: This is how much credit the
+          customer will be given eg $5000)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Currency to be used for Billing Account</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Start and End Dates</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>There are currently two ways to add a party to a billing
+        account.</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a party id in the 'Party Billed To' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Use the 'Roles' sub menu to add a party id with the role of
+            'Bill To Customer'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>If using the first method then when you press the update
+            button this removes the party id from this field and automatically
+            creates the party under the Roles sub menu with the role of 'Bill
+            To Customer'</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </note>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I create a new Billing Account?</title>
+
+        <para>Example: To create a new Billing Account</para>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>Check if the party doesnt have the role 'Bill To Customer' is
+          it automatically added when the billing account is created or will
+          the creation fail?..</para>
+        </note>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'New' button and the 'Edit Billing Account' screen
+            is displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a code or number for the 'Billing Account Id'<note>
+                <para>If this is left blank a number will be automatically
+                generated</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a number for the 'Billing Account Limit' (eg
+            5000)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Account Currency UOM Id' as it is <note>
+                <para>This should be the default currency for
+                Company...</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a description that can be used to identify the Billing
+            Account (eg Joe Bloggs Builders Billing Account)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Contact Mech' field as it is<note>
+                <para>This field cannot be filled in until either the 'Party
+                Billed To' has been filled in or a party with the role of
+                'Bill To Customer' has been added under the 'Roles' sub
+                menu.</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the Billing Account start date in the 'From Date'
+            field. <note>
+                <para>If left blank then this will default to the current date
+                and time. NOTE TO CHECK: Can this date be in the
+                future.....?</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Thru date' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter or use the lookup to select the 'Party Billed
+            To'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>After the 'Update' button has been pressed then the 'Contact
+        Mech Id' field will either be automatically filled in or will allow
+        you to select a contact mech from a drop down list</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update an existing Billing Account?</title>
+
+        <para>Billing Account details can be updated. A key field that may
+        need to be updated is the actual Billing Account Limit if a customer
+        reduces or improves their credit rating</para>
+
+        <para>Example: To Update a Billing Account</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click on the 'Billing Account Id' of the Billing Account to
+            updated</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Edit Billing Account' screen is displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the changes required</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete a Billing Account?</title>
+
+        <para>Billing Accounts cannot be deleted. They can only be expired.
+        This means that they will no longer be able to be used to associate
+        invoices or payments against.</para>
+
+        <para>Example: To Expire a Billing Account</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click on the 'Billing Account Id' of the Billing Account to
+            be expired</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Edit Billing Account' screen is displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the current date in the 'Thru date' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Find Billing Account</title>
+
+      <para>The default screen is for the Billing Account tab is 'Find Billing
+      Account'. It is used to locate existing billing accounts that have been
+      created.</para>
+
+      <para>The user has the option to select an existing billing account or
+      create a new one by clicking on the 'New' button.</para>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_FinAccountMain">
+    <title>Financial Account</title>
+
+    <para>A financial account is a tool (similar to bank account statement)
+    that is used for monitoring monetary transactions. Normally they will be
+    linked to a party and the various transactions details (eg payments or
+    receipts) will be shown as entries.</para>
+
+    <para>The entries for a financial account can be displayed using the
+    'Financial Account' tab in Accounting or in Party Manager if you enter a
+    party as the owner of the financial account.</para>
+
+    <para>Currently in OFBiz financial accounts can have the following
+    types:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Bank Account (by default this type will post to 213500 CUSTOMER
+        DEPOSIT ACCOUNTS)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Deposit Account (by default this type will post to 213500
+        CUSTOMER DEPOSIT ACCOUNTS)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Gift Certificate (by default this type will post to 213200 GIFT
+        CERTIFICATES UNREDEEMED)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Investment Account (by default this type will post to 213500
+        CUSTOMER DEPOSIT ACCOUNTS)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Replenish Account (no default posting account in demo data
+        setup)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Service Credit Account (no default posting account in demo data
+        setup)</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>:</para>
+
+      <orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>In GL Account Defaults there is a specific tab 'FinAccount
+          Type Gl Account' for specifying which type of Financial accounts are
+          posted to which general ledger account.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>In GL Account Defaults there is also a tab 'Payment Method Id
+          / GL Account ID' for specifying the account to post transactions to
+          if 'Financial Account' is selected as the Payment Method instead of
+          (Cash, Cheque, Credit Card, etc). By default the demo setup posts
+          transactions to 111100 GENERAL CHECKING ACCOUNT.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>You can also setup each financial account to post to a specific
+    general ledger account for each party. This is done via a specific field
+    during the creation or update of a financial account. This will override
+    the default setting by type.</para>
+
+    <para>Financial Accounts can be used for the following</para>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Managing and Tracking Customer Prepaid Accounts</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Managing and Tracking Customer Credit Limit <note>
+            <para>Need to verify this</para>
+          </note></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Managing Electronic Gift Certificates / Gift Vouchers/ Gift
+        Card</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Reload of Electronic Gift Card</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Company Bank Account Transaction Tracking</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Financial Account Main Screen</title>
+
+      <para>The default screen for Financial Accounts displays a list of any
+      bank accounts that have been created. Details listed include the account
+      the following:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>account name</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>organisation the account is linked to</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>account balances (available and actual)</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Find Financial Account Reconciliations</title>
+
+      <para>This screen displays the details of any reconciliations in
+      progress for a financial account. Only reconciliations that have actual
+      transactions associated with them will be displayed. If a reconciliation
+      group has no transactions assigned to it then it will not be
+      displayed.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>View GL Reconciliation</title>
+
+      <para>This screen gives an overview of a reconciliation group / bank
+      reconciliation. Note that a reconciliation must have at least one
+      transaction associated with it for this screen to be displayed. It is
+      used as follows:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>to view transactions associated with a reconciliation group /
+          bank reconciliation</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>to remove transactions from a reconciliation group / bank
+          reconciliation</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>to reconcile the reconciliation group / bank
+          reconciliation</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para>The screen displays the current reconciliation details plus
+      details of the previous reconciliation if one exists. This ensures the
+      closing balance of the previous reconciliation is the same as the
+      opening balance for the current one.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I edit reconciliation?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Edit' button in the 'Current Bank
+            Reconciliation'part of the screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Edit Financial Account Reconciliations' screen
+            isdisplayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Update the details required</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I remove a transaction from a bank
+        reconciliation?</title>
+
+        <para>On the lower part of the screen a list of all transactions
+        associated with the reconciliation is displayed.</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that needs to be
+            removed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The transaction is removed</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I reconcile a bank reconciliation?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>A total of all transactions associated with the
+            reconciliation is shown in the lower part of the screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Reconcile' button next to the total</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Each transaction status will be changed to 'Approved' and
+            the reconciliation / bank reconciliation status will be changed to
+            'Reconciled'<note>
+                <para>This means that no new transactions can be added to this
+                reconciliation and it will no longer be available to assign
+                transactions to</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Financial Account Reconciliations</title>
+
+      <para>This screen is used to create or update a reconciliation group /
+      bank reconciliation. The following details can be input or updated for
+      the reconciliation:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>GL Reconciliation Name or Identifier</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description for the reconciliation</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Organisation Party Id for the reconciliation</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Opening Balance for the reconciliation</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reconciliation date</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Deposit Slips</title>
+
+      <para>This section describes how to create, find, and edit deposit
+      slips.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>New Deposit Slip</title>
+
+        <para>This screen allows the user to create an Payment Group and the
+        transactions associated with the Payment Group will generate a deposit
+        slip. .</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create a New Deposit Slip?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Find' button to list all the available
+              transactions</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the transactions to include in the Payment Group by
+              using the 'Select All' or the check box that corresponds to the
+              transactions required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter a 'Payment Group Name' if required (If none is
+              entered then by default this will be 'Payment Group
+              Name')</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Create Batch' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>A button to print the deposit slip will be displayed as
+              well as the edit screen to make any further changes to the
+              Payment Batch</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Find Deposit Slips</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to locate payment groups and their
+        associated deposit slips that have been created. Deposit slips are
+        created by grouping transactions together into a Payment Group. This
+        can be done using the 'Accounting / Payment Group' tab, the 'Financial
+        Account / Deposit Withdraw' tab or the 'Create New Deposit Slip'
+        button.</para>
+
+        <para>Currently Deposit Slips are created for AR Batch Payments
+        only.</para>
+
+        <para>The deposit slips are available in PDF format and there is an
+        option to cancel the batch that generated the deposit slip if
+        required.</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I locate an existing Deposit Slip?</title>
+
+          <para>Enter some characters from the 'Payment Group Id' or 'Payment
+          Group Name' if known</para>
+
+          <para>Press the 'Search' button</para>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update an existing Deposit Slip?</title>
+
+          <para><orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the Payment Group required</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the Payment Group by clicking on the Payment
+                Group Id</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>The 'Edit Payment Group' screen is displayed Add any
+          new payment deposits or update existing deposits for the Payment
+          Group All changes in the Payment Group will automatically be updated
+          to the Deposit Slip</para>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I delete an existing Deposit Slip?</title>
+
+          <para>A deposit slip can not be directly deleted but it is removed
+          when a Payment Group is cancelled Press the 'Cancel' button next to
+          the Payment Group required to cancel a payment group The Payment
+          Group is removed from the 'Find Deposits' screen and no deposit
+          slips can be viewed or printed.</para>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Edit Deposit Slip</title>
+
+        <para>This screen displays the details of a Payment Group and its
+        transactions. The Deposit Slip for the Payment Group can be printed if
+        required and the Payment Group itself can be updated. Details that can
+        be updated include the name of the Payment Group itself and the
+        addition, removal or update of transactions.</para>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>Any changes to the Payment Group will be automatically updated
+          to the Deposit Slip.</para>
+        </note>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update a Deposit Slip?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the Payment Group required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Update the 'Payment Group Name' if required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Use the lookup for 'Payment Id' to add new transactions to
+              the Payment Group if required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Use the 'Cancel' button next to a particular transaction
+              to remove it from the Payment Group</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Update' or 'Add' buttons as required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Print Deposit Slip' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+
+          <para>The Deposit Slip will be displayed with the latest details of
+          the transactions for the Payment Group</para>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Financial Account Deposit / Withdraw</title>
+
+      <para>By default this screen will display all payment transactions both
+      incoming and outgoing that have not already been associated with a
+      financial account that represents one of the company's bank
+      accounts.</para>
+
+      <para>This screen also gives the option to create new deposit or
+      withdrawal payments. The user can select a number of incoming deposit
+      payments (eg Customer Payments etc) and group them together into a
+      payment group (i.e AR Batch of Payments) that will create a 'deposit
+      slip'.</para>
+
+      <para>If you select a number of incoming payments and dont group them
+      then no payment group is created (and therefore not deposit slip either)
+      but the individual transactions will be created for the 'bank account'
+      financial account.</para>
+
+      <para>Note that outgoing payments cannot be grouped together and will
+      not create a 'deposit slip'.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I list Deposit or Withdrawal Payments not linked to a
+        Bank Account?</title>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Find' button on the 'Deposit/Withdraw' screen.</para>
+
+        <para>All deposit and withdrawal transactions not associated with a
+        bank 'financial account' will be displayed.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I group payments and create a deposit slip?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press 'Find' to list all Deposit or Withdrawal
+            payments</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Use the 'Select All' or click on the check box associated
+            with the transactions required</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a name for the Payment Party Group Name (eg XYZ
+            Deposits) to group the transactions together</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Deposit/Withdraw' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>A deposit will be created that can be viewed under the 'Deposit
+        Slip' tab and grouped transaction will be created under the
+        'Transactions' tab with a link to the deposit slip breakdown</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Financial Account Authorizations</title>
+
+      <para>An authorization is a temporary transaction showing a commitment
+      to take money from a financial account. It is like a 'transaction in
+      progress' where there can be delay between when you buy something and
+      the time it actually appears on your statement.</para>
+
+      <para>Authorizations can be time limit specific meaning that they can be
+      controlled by entering a start and end date so that they are only valid
+      for a certain length of time. They can also be expired. When an
+      authorization is expired it removes the commitment from the financial
+      account. The history of expired authorizations are shown on the
+      financial account.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>This could be very useful in ensuring that customers are not
+        overcommitted and keeping within their approved credit limits.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add an authorization?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter an amount in the 'Amount' field (Eg 1000)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Currency' field blank as the default currency
+            will be used</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a date in the 'Authorisation Date' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'From Date' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Thru Date' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Add' button<note>
+                <para>When you now view the Financial Account detail the
+                'Actual Balance' and 'Available Balance' fields will be
+                different.</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update an authorization?</title>
+
+        <para>An authorization cannot be updated. It can only be expired. If
+        you have made a mistake and need to change an authorization then it
+        needs to expired and then re-created correctly.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete an authorization?</title>
+
+        <para>Authorizations are not deleted they are instead expired. This
+        means that the history of the authorizations will remain on the
+        account as an audit trail.</para>
+
+        <para>Example: To expire an authorisation</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Authorizations' tab for the Financial
+            Account</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Any authorizations will be displayed at the bottom of the
+            screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>If the authorization is still current the 'Thru Date' field
+            will be blank<note>
+                <para>CHECK: May not always be true as you can specify a
+                future date for it to expire......!!!</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Expire' button next to the authorisation to be
+            expired</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>The authorization is removed from the financial account and the
+        screen is redisplayed with the 'Thru Date' field completed</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Find Financial Account Transactions</title>
+
+      <para>A transaction is an entry that is shown on the financial account.
+      Transactions can be one of the following types:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Deposits</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Withdrawals</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Adjustments</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para>Transactions are used to show entries and the financial history of
+      the financial account. Similar to a bank account or credit card
+      statement the transaction will show details of what was spent or paid
+      into the account.</para>
+
+      <para>Some transaction totals have been added to this screen to help as
+      part of the reconciliation processes. Additional details available
+      include number of transactions, transaction totals and status.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I find transactions for a Financial Account?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Search' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>A list of transactions for the financial account will be
+            displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Financial Account Bank Reconciliation</title>
+
+        <para>Bank Reconciliation is a regular task where transactions from
+        the company bank statement are matched against transactions that have
+        occurred in the General Ledger. This is done based on a specific
+        date(NOTE: This can be done daily, weekly but is usually an end of
+        month). A specific GL account is normally used to represent the
+        company bank account and any accounting transaction that involves the
+        bank account will automatically record and entry in the GL</para>
+
+        <para>The bank reconciliation process ensures that the GL account and
+        the bank statement reconcile to the same amounts. Differences can
+        occur between the GL and the bank statement for a variety of valid
+        reasons including the following:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Payments or Deposits in process (especially cheques)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Interest or Bank Charges that are not known in advance but
+            are applied to the bank account</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Currency or Exchange Rate variations / charges</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Any outstanding</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>The differences will occur because of timing differences of
+          when and how transactions are recorded. Examples are as
+          follows:</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Bank charges are known to the bank first and only once
+              they have applied the charge to the bank account can the company
+              duplicate the transaction in the GL to make the balance
+              reconcile.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>A customer cheque payment may be recorded in the GL first
+              before it is paid into the bank account</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </note>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create a Bank Reconciliation?</title>
+
+          <para>The bank reconciliation process is made up of 3 steps.</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Creating an account reconciliation group</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Assigning transactions to the reconciliation</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Validating the figures and confirming the
+              reconciliation</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create an account reconciliation group for Bank
+          Reconciliation?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Go to the Financial Account 'Reconciliation' sub menu for
+              the bank account to be reconciled</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Create New Financial Account Reconciliations'
+              button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Complete the details (eg name, description, organisation
+              and opening balance) required on the 'Add New Financial Account
+              Reconciliations' screen and press the 'Create' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The new account reconciliation group is created and may be
+              used to assign transactions to</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I locate transactions that have not been assigned to a
+          Bank Reconciliation?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Go to the Financial Account 'Transactions' sub menu of the
+              bank account to be reconciled</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Find Transactions For Financial Account: XXXX' is
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Use the dropdown box for 'GL Reconciliation Id' field to
+              select 'Not Assigned' and then press the 'Search' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>A list of transactions (deposits, withdrawals or
+              adjustments) that have not been reconciled will be displayed
+              (NOTE: If no transactions are displayed then there are no
+              transactions to reconcile)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Click on the 'check box' at the end of the transaction
+              line that corresponds to the entry that needs to be assigned
+              (NOTE:More than one transaction can be selected at a
+              time)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Above the 'check box' is the 'Assign to Reconciliation'
+              button and to the left of this is a dropdown box to select the
+              reconciliation that the transaction is to be assigned to.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Using the drop down box select the reconciliation required
+              and press the 'Assign to Reconciliation' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The transaction is removed from the 'Not Assigned' status
+              and added to the specified reconciliation group</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I validate and confirm the Bank
+          Reconciliation?</title>
+
+          <para>Validation can be done for individual transactions or for the
+          complete account reconciliation group. The user controls this by the
+          search criteria entered on this screen.</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Go to the 'Transactions' sub menu for the bank account and
+              press the 'Bank Reconciliation' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the 'GL Reconciliation Id' that is to be
+              reconciled</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Click on the 'Select All' check box on the right hand side
+              of the screen. (NOTE: All transactions in this group will be
+              reconciled)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Reconcile' button above the 'Select All' check
+              box</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I view a Bank Reconciliation?</title>
+
+          <para>Once all the transactions in a reconciliation group have been
+          reconciled then the status of the group is changed to 'Reconciled'.
+          This means that no new transactions can be added to the is group and
+          the reconciled balance is fixed.</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Go to the 'Reconciliation' sub menu for the bank
+              account</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>A list of all the bank reconciliation groups are displayed
+              with details of the status (eg Created or Reconciled)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Click on the 'GL Reconciliation Id' of the group and the
+              details are displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I cancel a Bank Reconciliation?</title>
+
+          <para>If a bank reconciliation needs to be cancelled due to a
+          mistake or error then the bank reconciliation can be cancelled as
+          long as it has not been fully reconciled (i.e. the status of the
+          reconciliation has not been changed to 'Reconciled'. This will allow
+          you to start the bank reconcilation again.</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Go to the 'Reconciliation' sub menu for the bank
+              account</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>A list of all the bank reconciliation groups are displayed
+              (NOTE: If no transactions are associated with a reconciliation
+              group then it will not be displayed here)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Click on the 'Cancel' button associated with the 'GL
+              Reconciliation Id' of the group that needs to be
+              cancelled</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>All transactions will be removed from the reconciliation
+              group and their status will be changed back to 'Not Assigned' so
+              that they can be re-assigned to this or any other
+              reconciliation.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Edit Financial Account Transactions</title>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">How do I add transactions to a financial
+        account?</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>An example of how to bring in an opening balance is shown
+        below:</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Navigate to the the Financial Account Transactions sub
+            menu</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select 'Adjustment' in the Fin Account Trans Type Id
+            field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Party Id' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fill in the 'Transaction Date' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fill in the 'Entry Date' field<note>
+                <para>CHECK: This could be useful in identifying transactions
+                to a greater level of detail....</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fill in the 'Amount' field with the transaction amount (Eg.
+            In our case this is the opening balance such as 353.88 - dont
+            think we need the $ sign)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Payment Id' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Order Id' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Order Item Seq Id' field blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Reason Enum Id' field blank<note>
+                <para>CHECK: This could be useful in identifying transactions
+                to a greater level of detail....</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fill in the 'Comments' field (Eg: Opening Balance from XYZ
+            Statement)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Add' button and the transaction will be displayed
+            at the bottom of the screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>When you now view the Financial Account detail the 'Actual
+          Balance' and 'Available Balance' fields will show the entered
+          opening balance (eg 353.88)</para>
+        </note>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Other ways to add transactions to a
+        financial account?</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>By selecting financial account as a payment method for a
+            customer</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>By selecting financial account as a refund method for a
+            customer</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Financial Account Roles</title>
+
+      <para>The Financial Account Roles sub menu screen allows you specify a
+      party and link them to a role for a particular financial account.</para>
+
+      <para>It can be used to add party roles eg 'Approver' or 'Administrator'
+      for credit limits or updates to the account. If an account belongs to a
+      company then you may want to add a person as a 'Contact' for dealing
+      with the account.</para>
+
+      <para>The roles can also be time bound. This means that you can specify
+      a start and end date for the party role.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a Party Role to a Financial Account?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the 'Roles' sub menu for the Financial Account</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fill in the Party Id field by using the field lookup tool or
+            by directly entering the party id (eg flexadmin)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the role from the drop down list for the Role Type Id
+            field (eg administrator)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the From Date field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter if the Thru Date field (optional)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Create / Edit Financial Account</title>
+
+      <para>This screen allows the user to create a new financial account or
+      to edit an existing one.</para>
+
+      <para>The 'Financial Account' submenu is the first of four submenus used
+      in the creation or update of a Financial Account. On the creation or
+      update of a Financial Account it is the default screen that is
+      displayed.</para>
+
+      <para>It can be used for updating the basic details of a Financial
+      account such as:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Type of Account (eg Deposit, Investment, Gift
+          Certificate)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Account Status (Active, Frozen, Cancel, etc)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Account Name and Code</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Currency</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Owner Party ID</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Default GL Account for Posting</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Replenishment Level</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I create a new Financial Account?</title>
+
+        <para>Select the 'Create New Financial Account' button from the 'Find
+        Financial Accounts' screen</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Create/Update Financial Account' screen is
+            displayed.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Keep the default entry of 'Deposit Account' for the Fin
+            Account Type field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Keep the default entry of 'Active' for the status
+            field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter a description (eg ABC Customer Prepaid Account) for
+            the 'Fin Account Name' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the Fin Account Pin field blank<note>
+                <para>CHECK: I think this is only used in creation of Gift
+                Cards and Certificates..)</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the Fin Account Code field blank<note>
+                <para>CHECK: I think this is only used in the creation of Gift
+                Cards and Certificates...</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The currency field will be the default currency of Company
+            (eg USD). If this account is to be in another currency (eg EUR)
+            then select it from the drop down list.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Set the Organization Party ID field to be 'Company'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fill in the Owner Party Id field with the party id of the
+            customer who has the Financial Account (eg DemoCustomer or
+            DemoCustCompany)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fill in the 'Post to Gl Account field' to post the
+            transactions for this financial account to post to a specific GL
+            Account</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select the current date from the calendar to fill in the
+            'From date' field<note>
+                <para>It can be left blank and still appears to work</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Thru date' field blank <note>
+                <para>CHECK: I think this could be used to close or stop the
+                use of an account ..</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the default of 'Is Refundable' as 'Y' <note>
+                <para>CHECK: I think this will allow money to be refunded to
+                this account - eg if you have a return or credit for the
+                customer</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Replenish Payment ID' blank<note>
+                <para>CHECK: Not sure what this is - maybe to automatically
+                replenish account if it gets to a certain limit???)Leave the
+                'Replenish Level' blank (NOTE TO CHECK: Not sure what this is
+                but probably linked to Replenish Payment ID where you set the
+                limit - eg $100)</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Create' button and message appears saying that the
+        account was successfully created</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update an existing Financial Account?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Search' button on the Financial Account main
+            screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>A list of all existing Financial Accounts will be
+            displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Create/Update Financial' screen is displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Update the details of the financial account</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Find Financial Accounts</title>
+
+      <para>This screen is used to locate existing financial accounts that
+      have been created.</para>
+
+      <para>It also includes the option to use the 'Advanced Search' button to
+      display additional fields that can be used to locate a specific
+      financial account.</para>
+
+      <para>New Financial Accounts can be created using the 'Create New
+      Financial Account' button.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do locate an existing Financial Account?</title>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Search' button</para>
+
+        <para>A list of all existing Financial Accounts will be
+        displayed.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete an existing Financial Account?</title>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Search' button on the Financial Account main
+        screen</para>
+
+        <para>A list of all existing Financial Accounts will be
+        displayed</para>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Delete' button next to the Financial Account that
+        needs to be deleted.</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Help protlet List Bank Account</title>
+
+      <para>The default display is a list of financial accounts that have the
+      type 'bank account'. A company will have at least one main bank account
+      that will be used to accept payments from customers or to generate
+      payments to suppliers. The financial account will mirror the
+      transactions appearing on a bank statement so that they can be
+      reconciled with the true bank statement when it arrives.</para>
+
+      <para>Click on the bank account to display further information.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I remove a bank account?</title>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Delete' button next to the account that needs to be
+        deleted.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I remove a bank account?</title>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Delete' button next to the account that needs to be
+        deleted.</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_FindTaxAuthority">
+    <title>Tax Authorities</title>
+
+    <para>A tax authority is legal body usually the state (country) that
+    imposes a financial levy on business transactions.</para>
+
+    <para>In OFBiz tax authorities are used to calculate where business or
+    related taxes are due.</para>
+
+    <para>Tax setup is very important as it links into the calculated price
+    that you can charge your customers and also flows through into any related
+    legal documents that are generated (eg Sales Order, Sales Invoice,
+    Purchase Order etc).</para>
+
+    <para>Each country or region will have specific rules regarding what
+    should or should not be taxed. There will also be very strict regulations
+    on how taxable transactions should be recorded and tracked in the general
+    ledger or chart of accounts.</para>
+
+    <para>Tax authority setup allows configuration of the following :</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Income tax</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Value Added Tax (VAT) / Goods and Services Tax (GST)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Import / Export tax /Custom and Excise Duty</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>State, City or County taxes</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_FindAgreement">
+    <title>Agreements</title>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Aggreements</title>
+
+      <para>An agreement is a way of recording a business arrangements or
+      contract that your business makes with other companies or individuals.
+      Common examples include Payment Terms (where you allow a customer up to
+      30 days to pay you) or Prompt Payment Discounts (where you offer a
+      reduction on the amount owing if your customer pays you before a certain
+      date)</para>
+
+      <para>It can be used for the following:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Defining Payment Terms for Customers or Suppliers</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Defining Sales Commissions</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Setting up Prompt Payment Discounts</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Setting up Price Lists (NOTE TO DO: Need to investigate how
+          this logic overlaps with PRICE RULES in Catalog Manager)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Defining Late Fee Penalties</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Defining preferred freight carriers or specific codes to be
+          used</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Agreements Roles</title>
+
+      <para>This screen is used to assign a party roles for an
+      agreement.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a party role to an agreement?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Use the lookup to select the 'Party Id'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Use the drop down box to select the 'Party Role Id'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Add' button (NOTE: If the party does not have
+            this role associated with them then an error will be
+            displayed)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The new entry will be displayed in the lower part of the
+            screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update a party role for an agreement?</title>
+
+        <para>Party roles can only be added and deleted. They cannot be
+        updated.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete a party role from an agreement?</title>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Remove' button for the entry that needs to be
+        deleted.</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Agreement Work Effort</title>
+
+      <para>This screen is used to link a work effort to the whole agreement
+      or an individual agreement item.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a work effort to an agreement?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Use the drop down box to select the 'Agreement Item Seq
+            Id'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Use the lookup to select the 'Workeffort Id'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The new entry is displayed in the lower part of the
+            screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update a work effort for an agreement?</title>
+
+        <para>Work efforts can only be added or deleted. They cannot be
+        updated</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete a work effort from an agreement?</title>
+
+        <para>Press the 'Delete' button for the entry that needs to be
+        deleted</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Agreement Items</title>
+
+      <para>This section describes the screens that manage different agreement
+      items.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Edit Agreement Geo</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to create a geographical location for an
+        agreement item.<note>
+            <para>A new entry can be created or removed but not
+            updated.</para>
+          </note></para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Edit Agreement Item Party</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to add or update a party linked to an
+        agreement item. This could be useful for storing specific contact
+        names associated with an agreement item.</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update a party for an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <para>Parties for an agreement item cannot be updated. They can only
+          be added or removed.</para>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Edit Agreement Item Product</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to create or update a product entry for an
+        agreement item.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Edit Agreement Item Supplier Product</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to create or update a product entry for a
+        supplier agreement item. Any updates made in this screen can also be
+        viewed in Catalog Manager for the product under the product
+        'Suppliers' and 'Agreements' tabs.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Edit Agreement Item</title>
+
+        <para>This screen allows specific items to be added to agreement.
+        Currently these are limited to the following:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Pricing</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Commission Rate</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Sub-Agreement</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Exhibit</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Section</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Create Agreement Item' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Item' screen is displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the 'Agreement Item Type Id' from the drop down
+              box</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Use the drop down box to select the 'Currency' for the
+              Agreement Item</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter any 'Agreement Text' if required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter path for 'Agreement Image' if required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>A new sub menu will be displayed containing
+              'Promotions','Terms','Products','Party' and 'Geo' for additional
+              details that can be setup for the agreement item</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I edit an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the agreement item to be updated by clicking on the
+              Agreement Item Id</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Item' screen is displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Update the fields required (NOTE: Additional details can
+              be updated by selecting the Promotions, Terms, Product, Party or
+              Geo sub menus)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Edit Agreement Item Term</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to create or update the terms for an
+        agreement item.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>List Agreement Geo</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to display a list of the geographical
+        locations that are valid for the agreement item.</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create a new geographical location for an agreement
+          item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'New' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Geographical Application' screen is
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Use the drop down box to select the 'Geo Id'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I delete a geographical location for an agreement
+          item?</title>
+
+          <para>Press the 'Delete' button for the entry that needs to be
+          deleted</para>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Agreement Items Parties</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to display any parties that have been linked
+        to this agreement item.</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create a party for an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'New' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Item Party' screen is displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Manually enter or use the lookup to select the 'Party
+              Id'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I remove a party for an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <para>Press the 'Delete' button for the entry that needs to be
+          deleted.</para>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Agreement Item Products</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to link a specific product or products to an
+        agreement. This can be useful for restricting a discount or product
+        pricing to a particular product (or range of products) for a specific
+        customer.</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I add a product to an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'New Product' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Item Product' screen is
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Manually enter or use the lookup to select the 'Product
+              Id'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter the 'Price' to be associated to the product for this
+              agreement item</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update a product linked to an agreement
+          item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the product required by clicking on the 'Product
+              Id'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Item Product' screen is
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Update the 'Price' for the product (NOTE: Only product
+              price is available for update)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I delete a product from an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <para>Press the 'Remove' button on the entry that needs to be
+          deleted</para>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>List Agreement Item Supplier Products</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to link a specific product (or range of
+        products) to an agreement. This can be useful for restricting a
+        discount or product pricing to a product (or range of products) for a
+        particular supplier.</para>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>Products created here will be linked to the product and can be
+          view using Catalog Manager. Entries can be viewed under the Product
+          'Suppliers' and 'Agreements' tabs.</para>
+        </note>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I add a product to an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'New Product' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Item Product' screen is
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Manually enter or use the lookup to select the 'Product
+              Id'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter the 'Available From Date'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Leave the 'Thru Date' blank</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Using the drop down box select the 'Supplier Order Pref
+              Id'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter the 'Last Price'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter 'Supplier Product Id'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter any other details as required or leave blank</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update a product linked to an agreement
+          item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the product required by clicking on the 'Product
+              Id'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Item Product' screen is
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Update the details as required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I delete a product from an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <para>Press the 'Remove' button on the entry that needs to be
+          deleted</para>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Agreements Item Terms</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to enter or maintain terms that are specific
+        to an agreement item. The terms available are the same as those found
+        under the 'Agreement Terms' tab and any related terms will be
+        displayed both here and under the 'Agreement Items' tab .</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create a term for an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Create Term' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Item Term' screen is displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter the term details required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update a term for an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the term for the agreement item by clicking on the
+              term id</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Item Term' screen is displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Update the details required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I delete a term for an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <para>Press the 'Remove' button on the term entry that needs to be
+          deleted.</para>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>List Agreement Items</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to display a list of items that have been
+        created for an agreement.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Agreements Item Promotions</title>
+
+        <para>This screen is used to enter or maintain any promotions that are
+        associated with the Agreement Item. This can be useful if you want to
+        limit where a particular promotion is applied. Promotions are setup in
+        Catalog Manager and can be selected here.</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I add a promotion to an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Add New Promotion' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Promo Applications' screen is
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the 'Product Promo Id' from the drop down
+              box</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter the 'From Date'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter the 'Thru Date' if required (NOTE:This can be left
+              blank)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter the 'Sequence Num' if required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I edit an existing promotion for an agreement
+          item?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the agreement item promotion by clicking on on the
+              promotion id</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit Agreement Promo Applications' screen is
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Update the details required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I delete a promotion from an agreement item?</title>
+
+          <para>Press the 'Remove' button on the entry that needs to be
+          deleted.</para>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Agreement Terms</title>
+
+      <para>Agreement Terms are the rules that make up the agreement.
+      Agreements may have a one or more terms.</para>
+
+      <para>Examples of agreement terms from a sales and purchase viewpoint
+      include the following:<itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Payment due within a certain timeframe (eg 30 days)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Discounts for early payment</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Specifying Late fee penalties</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Purchasing agreements</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Exclusive Relationship</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist><note>
+          <para>Agreements can also be specified for Employment, Legal, Non
+          Compete etc.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para>Agreement terms are configured by linking them to the Invoice Item
+      Type.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>The drop down box for 'Invoice Item Type' contains what appears
+        to be duplicates for items such as 'Invoice Fee', 'Invoice Discount',
+        'Invoice Finished Good Item' etc. These are NOT duplicates one of
+        these entries refers to the Sales Invoice and the other refers to the
+        Purchase Invoice. As the descriptions are exactly the same it is
+        impossible to know which refers to which so needs to be done using
+        trial and error</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a payment term for 30 days?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select 'Payment Net Days' from the 'Term Type Id' drop down
+            box</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter '30' in the 'Term Days' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>ress the 'Submit' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a discount term of 2% if paid within 10
+        days?</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select 'Payment Discounted if paid with Specified Days' from
+            the 'Term Type Id' drop down box</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter '2' in the 'Term Value' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter '10' in the 'Term Days' field</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I specify pricing in a specific currency only for this
+        customer or supplier?</title>
+
+        <para>This is done using the 'Agreement Items' sub menu</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete a payment term?</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the payment term required</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Remove'on the entry that needs to be
+            removed</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Agreement</title>
+
+      <para>The 'Agreement' sub menu is used to enter the basic details
+      required for setting up a new agreement or editing an existing
+      one.</para>
+
+      <para>It can be used to create or update the following details for an
+      Agreement:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The parties the agreement is between and their roles</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The agreement type (eg Sales, Purchase, Commission, Employment
+          etc)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Specific products</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Start and End Date</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I edit an agreement?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Find the agreement that needs to be amended</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click on Agreement Id</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Edit Agreement' screen will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Amend the details required and press the 'Submit' button
+            (NOTE: Additional agreement details can be updated via the other
+            tabs eg Agreement Terms, Agreement Roles, Agreement Items and
+            Agreement Work Effort Appls)</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I copy an existing agreement?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Find the agreement that needs to be copied</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click on the Agreement Id</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Edit Agreement' screen will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>At the bottom of the screen press the 'Copy' in the 'Copy
+            Agreement' window (NOTE: The default tick boxes will copy the
+            agreement terms, products and party. If not required then click on
+            the boxes to stop them being copied)</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Find Agreements</title>
+
+      <para>The default screen is for the Agreements tab is 'Find Agreements'.
+      It is used to locate existing agreements that have been created. The
+      user has the option to:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>use the 'Find' button to locate an existing agreement
+          or</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>create a new one by clicking on the 'Create Agreement'
+          button.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I locate an existing agreement?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter search option details if known</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Find' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>A list of existing agreements will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I create a new agreement?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Create Agreement' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Edit Agreement' screen is displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the details required and press the 'Submit'
+            button</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I cancel an agreement?</title>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the agreement required</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press the 'Cancel' button on the agreement entry that needs
+            to be cancelled</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_ListFixedAssets">
+    <title>Fixed Assets</title>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_FindGlobalGlAccount">
+    <title>Global GL Settings</title>
+
+    <para>The Global GL Settings tab is where a limited global or 'master'
+    accounting configuration can be done. These include:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Reviewing the chart of account structure or hierarchy (Navigate
+        Accounts)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Adding new accounts</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Updating an existing account (eg. change the description, change
+        the type of account, change the parent account or hierarchy)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Linking an account from the master chart to 'Company' or any
+        other of your company departments, subsidiaries or business
+        units</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Creating new component costs for products</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Setting default accounts for different types of payments</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Setting default accounts for invoice line items</para>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>This includes all types eg: payroll, commission, purchase,
+          return, sales etc</para>
+        </note>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>Some of the configuration specified here can be over-ridden using
+      the 'Organization GL Settings' tab</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Cost Centers</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Find GL Account Category</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>View Foreign Exchange Rates</title>
+
+      <para>Foreign exchange rates are used to convert from one currency to
+      another. Usually a business will want to work in one main currency (eg
+      GBP) but will allow transactions in other currencies (eg EUR, USD).
+      These currencies will need to be converted to the main currency at some
+      point in order to generate financial reports (eg Balance Sheet or Income
+      Statement) and most importantly to adhere to tax authority
+      regulations.</para>
+
+      <para>OFBiz currently allows you to input to 3 different rates for the
+      same currency using the 'Purpose' field. With this you can specify
+      whether the conversion is to be used internally, externally or leave the
+      field blank. Also the start and end date for a conversion can be
+      specified beforehand.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I add a new foreign exchange rate?</title>
+
+        <para>To add a new rate for US Dollars (USD) to Euro (EUR)</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Using the drop down box on the 'From Currency' field, select
+            'American Dollar - USD'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Using the drop down box on the 'To Currency' field, select
+            'Euro - EUR'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Purpose' field can be left blank or you can select
+            'Internal Conversion' or 'External Conversion' from the drop down
+            list</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the exchange rate in the 'Rate' field (eg
+            0.72883)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the 'From Date' (NOTE: If left blank then will default
+            to the current date and time)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave the 'Thru Date' blank</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click the 'Update Foreign Currency Rates' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The new foreign exchange rate will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I update an existing foreign exchange rate?</title>
+
+        <para>Existing foreign exchange rates cannot be updated - instead the
+        existing rate is expired and a new rate is created. Currently up to 3
+        different exchange rates can be created by using the 'Purpose' field
+        to distinguish them.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I delete a foreign exchange rate?</title>
+
+        <para>Foreign exchange rates cannot be deleted. Existing rates can be
+        expired by entering a new exchange rate for the same currency and
+        purpose.</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>View Rates</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Invoice Item Type</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Payment Method Type</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Cost Calculations</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Custom Time Period</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Find Global GL Account</title>
+
+      <para>The default screen is for the Global GL Settings tab is 'List
+      Accounts'. If the demo data has been loaded then the default screen
+      displays a list of the general ledger accounts that form the Global
+      Chart of Accounts template. All general ledger accounts must exist in
+      the global template before it can be assinged to be used at the
+      organisation level (eg Company) It is used to view or edit the details
+      of the general ledger accounts in the global template and there are
+      options to print or export the account details.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>How do I view details for an account?</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Locate the account required</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click on account id</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The account details will be displayed</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="accounting_ListCompanies">
+    <title>Organization GL Settings</title>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Available Internal
+    Organizations</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>The default screen shows a list of Party Groups that have the role
+    of 'Internal Organization' associated with them. If you have installed the
+    demo data then the default company 'Company' as well as departments /
+    business units and regional subsidiaries will be displayed.</para>
+
+    <para>The list has two command buttons, Setup and Accounting.</para>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Setup</title>
+
+      <para>In the Demo data the default Company is set up. To setup other
+      organizations:<orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>In the Available Internal Organizations list clicke the
+            'Setup' button</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The Accounting Preferences screen is displayed with defaults
+            copied from the Company record.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter any changes that are required (eg Invoice Prefix,
+            Error Journal name - as you may want error transactions from
+            separate departments to be handled differently...)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click Add</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist></para>
+
+      <para>The Setup menu includes options to manage:<itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Accounting Preferences</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Chart of Accounts</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Journals</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>GL Account Defaults</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Time Period</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist> The following sections discuss each of these
+      features.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Accounting Preferences</title>
+
+        <para>Accounting Preferences are a set of configuration details that
+        are related to a party. To appear on this screen the party must be
+        setup with the role of 'Internal Organisation'. This means that you
+        can add the internal organisation role to a party and they will be
+        added to this screen and then can be configured.</para>
+
+        <para>The master default party is 'Company' but preferences can also
+        be setup for internal departments as described in the section above.
+        Unless overridden then then all other parties appearing on this screen
+        will take their default setup from 'Company' <note>
+            <para>The majority of the configuration information displayed in
+            Accounting Preferences are taken from the Enumeration
+            entity.</para>
+          </note></para>
+
+        <para>It is used for setting specifying information related to the
+        accounting setup for a specific organisation or parties that exist
+        within an organisation such as business units, cost centres,
+        departments ,subsidiaries etc. Information that can be setup include
+        the following:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The start date of the Time Periods and Fiscal or Accounting
+            Year (eg 1st April, 1st January, 1st June etc)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Tax Return Form<note>
+                <para>Need to check how important this is and where it is
+                used.......possibly some kind of reporting???</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The method to be used for calculating Cost of Goods Sold
+            (COGS)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Base Currency - eg USD, GBP, EUR etc (NOTE: May have main
+            company in USD but a subsidiary in EUR etc)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Invoice prefix, numbering and sequencing (eg you may want
+            each business unit / subsidiary to have its own invoice numbering
+            or sequence etc)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Quote prefix, number and sequencing</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Method to be used for refunds (eg cheque, direct bank
+            credit, voucher credit etc...)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Specify which journal will be used to store error
+            transactions</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>Key things that are usually need to be amended include the
+          base currency for the company, fiscal year information and invoice
+          numbering prefix or sequencing.</para>
+        </note>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>About GL Account Defaults</title>
+
+        <para>The GL Account Defaults screens are are method to setup rules
+        that are used to translate business transactions into accounting
+        transactions. It currently is made up of 12 sub menus that can be used
+        to map various transaction type codes to a specific general ledger
+        account Accounting transactions are made up of a Debit Entry and a
+        Credit Entry. The GL Account defaults screens help map which accounts
+        are to be used to generate a each part of the transaction. This means
+        that certain mappings will be used to generate the Debit (or DR) entry
+        part of the transaction and others used to generate the Credit (or CR)
+        entry part of the transaction. <note>
+            <para>Many of the accounting transactions are generated
+            'automatically' (or in the background) using the the accounting
+            services SECAS / EECAS.</para>
+          </note></para>
+
+        <para>The GL Account Type is used to specify the default account that
+        certain transactions (eg Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, etc)
+        are posted to. An accounting transaction (or journal entry) is made up
+        of two parts - a Debit Entry and a Credit Entry that balance each
+        other. The GL Account Type is used to translate one side of the
+        journal entry.</para>
+
+        <para>GL Account Types are stored in Entity GLAccountType which can be
+        viewed via Entity Data Maintenance in the Webtools menu. There are
+        currently 57 different GL Account Types that are part of the OFBiz
+        demo data but only 19 of these are setup as mappings How the GL
+        Account Type is used is best shown by an example. A very simple
+        description of an online Sales Order Process could be as
+        follows:</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Customer Orders a Product (and Creates a Sales Order)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Customer Pays for Product (via Credit Card, Internet Banking
+            etc)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Vendor confirms Payment and Dispatches the Product to the
+            Customer</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>Let's focus on the first part step of 3 in more detail.</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The vendor has checked their bank statement and seen that
+            the customer has paid</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>In OFBiz Order Manager they will then look up the relevant
+            Sales Order and then click the 'Receive Payment' button to log the
+            payment in the system</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The 'Receive Payment' button is a trigger for an 'automatic'
+            accounting transaction</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The transaction type that is triggered is called 'Incoming
+            Payment'</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The accounting entries generated are: DR 112000 Undeposited
+            Funds , CR 120000 Accounts Receivable</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para>The CR (or Credit) entry for the transaction is created by the
+        GL Acccount Type mapping for 'Accounts Receivable' (which by using the
+        demo data default will go the 120000 Accounts Receivable)</para>
+
+        <para>The DR (or Debit) entry for the transaction is created by a
+        different GL Account default, the Payment Method Id / GL Account Id
+        mapping (eg Cash is setup as 112000 Undeposited Receipts)</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create a new GL Account Type default
+          mapping?</title>
+
+          <para>There are currently 57 different GL Account Types that come as
+          part of the demo data with OFBiz. This should be enough to manage
+          the vast majority of business transactions. These instructions show
+          how to add a mapping using the default data</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the 'GL Account Type Id' from the drop down
+              list</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the 'GL Account' to map it to from the drop down
+              list</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The new GL Account Type mapping is displayed in the list
+              at the bottom of the screen</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>If none of the demo data GL Account Types are sufficient
+            then new ones can be added using Entity Data Maintenance and the
+            entity 'GLAccountType' in the Webtools menu.</para>
+          </note>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update a GL Account Type default mapping?</title>
+
+          <para>A GL Account Type mapping cannot be updated directly but needs
+          to be removed then re-created. If you try to update an existing
+          entry you will get an 'duplicate key' error message.</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that you want
+              to update</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The entry is removed from the list of entries
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the 'GL Account Type Id' from the drop down
+              list</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the updated 'GL Account' to map it to from the drop
+              down list</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The new GL Account mapping is displayed in the list at the
+              bottom of the screen</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I delete a GL Account Type default mapping?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that you want
+              to delete</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The entry is removed from the list of entries
+              displayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Gl Account Default Screens</title>
+
+        <para>There are thirteen sub-screens underGL Account Defaults. They
+        are discussed in the following sections.</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Party GL Accounts</title>
+
+          <para>The Party / GL Account mapping allows the translation of
+          different account types (eg Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable
+          etc) for a party to be mapped to a separate general ledger account.
+          The party role (eg Bill To Customer) is also used to define the
+          mapping even further. OFBiz demo data setup comes with no entries
+          here. It is used as a way of implementing subledger functionality in
+          OFBiz. Subledger functionality is where a higher level account can
+          be split into lower levels. In this case these lower levels can be
+          by party.</para>
+
+          <para>An example could be that a business may want to use the
+          general ledger to track the Accounts Receivable (AR) by customer so
+          the chart of account would be setup something like as follows:
+          120000 Accounts Receivable</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>120010 Accounts Receivable - Customer A</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>120020 Accounts Receiviable - Customer B</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>120030 Accounts Receivalbe - Customer C</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <para>This has the main AR account is at the top of the hierarchy
+          and 3 sub accounts below it. Entries for Customers A, B and C would
+          be setup with a role of 'Bill From Customer' as this is a role
+          associated with the customer when the Sales Invoice is
+          generated.When a transaction matching the criteria is processed in
+          the system then these mappings will control where it is posted to.In
+          the case of Customer A any AR transactions with role 'Bill To
+          Customer' are posted to '120010' instead of the standard
+          '120000</para>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a new Party / GL Account mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Enter or Lookup the party for the 'Party Id'
+                field</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Role Type Id' from the drop down list<note>
+                    <para>Be careful that you select the correct role for the
+                    transactions you want to track......)</para>
+                  </note></para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'GL Account Type Id' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'GL Account Id' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new entry will be displayed at the bottom of the
+                screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Party / GL Account mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>Only the GL Account Id linked to the mapping can be
+            updated.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the Party / GL Account entry that needs to be
+                updated</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the new 'GL Account Id' from the drop down list
+                next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Update' button next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Party / GL Account mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the Party / GL Account entry that needs to be
+                removed</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Delete' button next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Tax Authority GL Accounts</title>
+
+          <para>The Tax Authority / GL Account default is used to map
+          different tax authorities to different general ledger accounts. This
+          setup will affect one side of a journal entry only. <note>
+              <para>A tax authority is legal body usually the state (country)
+              that imposes a financial levy on business transactions.</para>
+            </note></para>
+
+          <para>Normal business rules require you will to keep track amounts
+          collected or paid to different tax authorities separately. This
+          mapping ensures that money collected or paid to various tax
+          authorities (eg through Sales Orders, Purchase Orders etc) can be
+          separated into specific accounts</para>
+
+          <para>The OFBiz demo data comes with 9 entries to show an example of
+          how this can be setup using the some of the US states as separate
+          tax authorities.</para>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a Tax Authority / GL Account mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>Unlike the other GL Account defaults you cannot add a Tax
+            Authority / GL mapping through these screens. It needs to be done
+            via the 'GL Accounts' sub menu under the 'Tax Authorities' menu.
+            The method of how to add a mapping using the 'Tax Authorities' is
+            shown below.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>From the Accounting Manager / Tax Authorities Menu press
+                the 'Edit' button next to the Tax Authority required</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the sub menu 'GL Accounts'</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Enter or Lookup the party for the 'Organisation Party
+                Id' field (NOTE: Use 'Company' as default)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Enter or Lookup the GL Account to be mapped to</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The mapping will be displayed at the bottom of the
+                screen.</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Return to the Tax Authority / GL Account default and
+                this new mapping will be shown in the list</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Tax Authority / GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>Only the GL Account Id linked to the mapping can be
+            updated.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the Tax Authority / GL Account entry that needs
+                to be updated</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the new 'GL Account Id' from the drop down list
+                next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Update' button next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Tax Authority / GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the Tax Authority / GL Account entry that needs
+                to be removed</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Delete' button next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Credit Card Type GL Accounts</title>
+
+          <para>The Credit Card Type / GL Account default is used to map
+          different types of credit card to different general ledger accounts.
+          <note>
+              <para>This setup will affect one side of a journal entry
+              only.</para>
+            </note></para>
+
+          <para>This type of mapping is useful if you need to track the
+          amounts to be collected from different credit card agents. The OFBiz
+          demo data comes with some setup here<note>
+              <para>The demo entries appear to be duplicated...has something
+              changed in ENUM for defining each credit card
+              type.....?????</para>
+            </note></para>
+
+          <para>Examples are as follows:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>American Express</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Visa</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Mastercard</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Diners Club</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a Credit Card Type GL Account mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>There are 10 mappings that come as part of the OFBiz demo
+            data but they do appear to be duplicated for some reason.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Card Type' from the drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the updated 'GL Account Id' to map it to from the
+                drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The updated 'Credit Card Type / GL Account' mapping is
+                displayed in the list at the bottom of the screen <note>
+                    <para>Used 'Visa' as an example to update and the
+                    'CCT_VISA' was updated but the 'Visa' one wasnt. This is
+                    probably related to the duplication.</para>
+                  </note></para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Credit Card Type GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Card Type' from the drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the updated 'GL Account Id' to map it to from the
+                drop down lis</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The updated 'Credit Card Type / GL Account' mapping is
+                displayed in the list at the bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+
+            <note>
+              <para>Used 'Visa' as an example to update and the 'CCT_VISA' was
+              updated but the 'Visa' one wasnt. This is probably related to
+              the duplication.</para>
+            </note>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Credit Card Type GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that you
+                want to delete</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The entry is removed from the list of entries
+                displayed</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Variance Reason GL Accounts</title>
+
+          <para>The Variance Reason / GL Account default is used for mapping
+          any stock differences to a particular general ledger account. If
+          there are variances in the number of products that are in stock then
+          this affects the value of inventory in the general ledger. By using
+          this GL default you can offset any differences in stock to the
+          relevant general ledger account.</para>
+
+          <para>The number of products (or items) in stock can vary. These
+          differences can be caused by numerous reasons. Some of these could
+          be as follows:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Products have been damaged</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Products were lost or stolen</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Products were found</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Under or over supply of a Product from a Supplier (eg. You
+              have ordered 10 and 11 are delivered....)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Free samples or giveaways to potential clients <note>
+                  <para>These mappings are used in Catalog Manager when a
+                  manual inventory adjustment is done through the Inventory
+                  Item screens.</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a new Variance Reason / GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Variance Reason Id' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'GL Account Type Id' to map it to from the
+                drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new 'Variance Reason / GL Account Type' mapping is
+                displayed in the list at the bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Variance Reason / GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Variance Reason Id' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the updated 'GL Account Type Id' to map it to
+                from the drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The updated 'Variance Reason / GL Account Type' mapping
+                is displayed in the list at the bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Variance Reason / GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that you
+                want to delete</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The entry is removed from the list of entries
+                displayed</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Payment Method GL Account</title>
+
+          <para>The Payment Method GL Account Type Id is used to map the
+          different payment methods (eg Cash, Cheque etc) to a specific GL
+          Account Type Id. This will translate to one side of a GL entry
+          only.</para>
+
+          <para>A Payment Method is just a way to define the ways in which
+          payments can be made. Each payment method can be linked to a
+          different account in the general ledger. A main GL account used
+          would be the one that represents the Company bank account. In the
+          demo data mappings Electronic Funds Transfer, Company Account,
+          Financial Account are all linked to the Company bank account GL
+          account.</para>
+
+          <para>OFBiz demo data defines 15 different payment methods as
+          follows:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Cash</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Certified Cheque</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Company Account</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Company Cheque</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Electronic Funds Transfer<note>
+                  <para>CHECK: Problem with definition or terminology - is
+                  this a Direct Debit.... ?? A direct debit is controlled by
+                  the payee and an automatic payment via bank account is
+                  controlled by the payer)</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Billing Account</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Cash on Delivery (COD)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>eBay</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Offline Payment<note>
+                  <para>Is this ambiguous - since COD is an offline
+                  payment...</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>PayPal</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>WorldPay</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Financial Account</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Gift Certificate</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Money Order</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Personal Cheque</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>A point to note is that these payment methods don't include
+            Credit Cards....(which I think is on purpose...). The majority of
+            these payment methods are linked to 'Undeposited Receipts' but an
+            additional accounting transaction may be needed once the funds
+            have cleared and are available in the Company bank account.</para>
+          </note>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a new Payment Method Id / GL Account Id
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Payment Method Type' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'GL Account Id' to map it to from the drop
+                down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new Payment Method Type / GL Account Type mapping is
+                displayed in the list at the bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Payment Method Id / GL Account Id
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>A Payment Method Type / GL Account Type mapping cannot be
+            updated directly but needs to be removed then re-created. If you
+            try to update an existing entry you will get an 'duplicate key'
+            error message</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that you
+                want to update</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The entry is removed from the list of entries
+                displayed</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Payment Method Type' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the updated 'GL Account Type' to map it to from
+                the drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new Payment Method Type / GL Account Type mapping is
+                displayed in the list at the bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Payment Method Id / Gl Account Id
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that you
+                want to delete</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The entry is removed from the list of entries
+                displayed</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Payment Type GL Account</title>
+
+          <para>The Payment Type GL Account Type Id is used to translate (or
+          map) the different payment types to a specific GL Account Type Id.
+          The GL Account Type Id is then used via the 'GL Account Type Id'
+          defaults to translate to one side of a journal entry. <note>
+              <para>This GL Account default is used to link to another one of
+              the GL Account defaults. A Payment Type is just a way to
+              categorize transactions.</para>
+            </note></para>
+
+          <para>Examples of Payment Types could be as follows:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Commission Payments</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Customer Payments</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Vendor (or Supplier) Payments</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Customer Refunds</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Customer Prepayments or Deposits</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <para>These payment types can then be mapped to the required account
+          type in the Chart of Account. Examples of these type of mappings
+          could be as follows:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Customer Payments are mapped to Account Receivable</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Vendor (or Supplier) Payment are mapped to Account
+              Payable</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Customer Refunds are mapped to Customer Credits</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a Payment Type / GL Account Type Id
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Payment Type Id' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'GL Account Type Id' to map it to from the
+                drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new 'Payment Type / GL Account Type' mapping is
+                displayed in the list at the bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Payment Type / GL Account Type Id
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>A Payment Type / GL Account Type mapping cannot be updated
+            directly but needs to be removed then re-created. If you try to
+            update an existing entry you will get an 'duplicate key' error
+            message.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that you
+                want to update</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The entry is removed from the list of entries
+                displayed</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Payment Type Id' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the updated 'GL Account Type Id' to map it to
+                from the drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new 'Payment Type / GL Account Type' mapping is
+                displayed in the list at the bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Payment Type / GL Account Type Id
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry that you
+                want to delete</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The entry is removed from the list of entries
+                displayed</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Purchase Invoice</title>
+
+          <para>The Purchase Invoice sub menu is used to specify the default
+          account to be used for the individual line items that appear on a
+          Purchase Invoice. The items are identified by a line description
+          which can be mapped to a specific general ledger account. Purchase
+          invoices can be made up of a variety of items as well as the product
+          that is being bought (eg discounts, promotions, work effort or
+          labour costs etc). The majority of businesses will want to track
+          these type of items separately in the general ledger and this screen
+          will allow this type of setup. This setup will translate to one side
+          of the journal entry only. <important>
+              <para>This screen is one of the screens where the default
+              entries that are displayed here are entered via the Global GL
+              Settings under the sub menu 'Invoice Item Type'. This screen
+              allows users to override the global settings for the Purchase
+              Invoice item type. An example of why this could be necessary
+              could be that a company many want to isolate the sales reporting
+              of a specific department or business unit separately (eg
+              subledgers etc) but still have the option of a 'catch all'
+              global general ledger account.</para>
+
+              <para>Need to do more investigation but the it looks like these
+              Purchase Invoice mappings dont work when used as part of the
+              Purchase Order to Purchase Invoice Process.(Have been doing some
+              tests to try and get it to post to a different account than
+              'Uninvoiced Shipment Receipts' and 'Inventory' but hasnt worked
+              so far.) We need to be able to specify things such as Sales Tax,
+              Freight and any Purchase Order adjustments. These override
+              mappings do work if there is no Purchase Order just a Purchase
+              Invoice as shown in the simple process below.</para>
+            </important></para>
+
+          <para>How the Purchase Invoice mappings are used is best shown by an
+          example. A very simple description of a Purchase Invoice Process
+          could be as follows:</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>You have ordered something from a supplier (eg indirect
+              purchasing such as stationery etc via phone)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The Supplier ships the products to you<note>
+                  <para>as they are not stored in the Warehouse but in your
+                  offices - so dont need an Inventory Receive.....????</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>You receive the product and an invoice from the Supplier
+              (Purchase Invoice)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>You enter the Purchase Invoice pay the Supplier the amount
+              invoiced</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+
+          <para>Let's focus on step of 4 in more detail.</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>You have received the product from the supplier with an
+              invoice</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>In OFBiz you enter the Purchase Invoice using 'Create New'
+              in the 'Invoices' menu of Accounting Manager</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Using the 'Items' sub menu you can create individual items
+              on the Purchase Invoice (eg Paper, Pens, Sales Tax etc and they
+              dont need to have a Product Id associated with them)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>When you add a new invoice item to the Purchase Invoice it
+              is the 'Invoice Item Type' that is affected by the Purchase
+              Invoice override mappings</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The Purchase Invoice can then be moved to various statuses
+              (Approved, Received, Ready or Cancelled)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>When the status is moved to 'Ready' this is a trigger for
+              an 'automatic' accounting transaction</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The transaction type generated is called 'Purchase
+              Invoice' and it uses the Purchase Invoice override
+              mappings</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <para>Transaction Type: Purchase Invoice, DR 516100 Purchase Order
+          Adjustments , DR ????? Sales Tax, CR 210000 Accounts Payable</para>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a new Purchase Invoice override
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>By default there are no Purchase Invoice override mappings
+            that are configured as part of the OFBiz demo data.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Invoice Purchase Item Type' from the drop
+                down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the ' Invoice Override Expense GL Account Id' to
+                map it to from the drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new mapping will be displayed in the 'Invoice
+                Override Expense GL Account' column in the list at the bottom
+                of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Purchase Invoice override
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>An existing Purchase Invoice override mapping cannot be
+            updated but needs to be removed and a new mapping added. If you
+            try to add an override to an item that already has an override you
+            will get a duplicate record error message.</para>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Purchase Invoice override
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <note>
+              <para>Only the override mapping can be deleted. The default
+              mapping record cannot be deleted here (even though the Remove
+              button is displayed next to it!)</para>
+            </note>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the entry that needs the override deleted in the
+                list of Purchase Invoice override mappings</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The override mapping will be removed from the 'Invoice
+                Override Expense GL Account' column of the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Sales Invoice</title>
+
+          <para>The Sales Invoice sub menu is used to specify the default
+          account to be used for the individual line items that appear on a
+          Sales Invoice. The items are identified by a line description which
+          can be mapped to a specific general ledger account. Sales invoices
+          can be made up of a variety of items as well as the product that is
+          being sold (eg discounts, promotions, work effort or labour costs
+          etc). The majority of businesses will want to track these type of
+          items separately in the general ledger and this screen will allow
+          this type of setup.</para>
+
+          <para>This setup will translate to one side of the journal entry
+          only.</para>
+
+          <para>A key mapping used is linked directly to the Product Type (eg
+          Invoice Digital Good Item, Invoice Finished Good Item, Invoice
+          Finished/Digital Good Item....). This controls where the sales
+          revenue received from the sale of the product is stored in the
+          general ledger</para>
+
+          <para>Only a limited number of general ledger accounts that are
+          available to be mapped. Currently this is 7 and limited to the
+          accounts that have been assigned to the organisation from the Global
+          Chart of Accounts that have a 'GL Account Class Id' = 'Revenue'
+          (NOTE: You will see that Discounts on Sales is not available to be
+          selected because it's GL Account Class Id = 'Cost of Goods Sold
+          Expense'. It appears as a default because it is setup in the Global
+          GL settings that doesnt seem to have any limitations of the
+          account.) <important>
+              <para>This screen is one of the screens where the default
+              entries that are displayed here are entered via the Global GL
+              Settings under the sub menu 'Invoice Item Type'. This screen
+              allows users to override the global settings for the Sales
+              Invoice item type. An example of why this could be necessary
+              could be that a company many want to isolate the sales reporting
+              of a specific department or business unit separately (eg
+              subledgers etc) but still have the option of a 'catch all'
+              global general ledger account.</para>
+            </important></para>
+
+          <para>If an override account is added it will appear in the Override
+          GL Account column on the screen.</para>
+
+          <para>The only mapping that seems a bit out of place here is Sales
+          Tax. It is blank because Sales Tax is setup using Tax Authorities so
+          dont know why you would want to override the Sales Tax account to a
+          Sales Revenue Account. <note>
+              <para>Also need to highlight that in the Global Settings it uses
+              the ENUM description to select the item and there are duplicate
+              descriptions between the Sales Invoice and the Purchase Invoice.
+              Not too much of a problem here but it does cause problems in
+              Agreements when setting up things like Commissions based on line
+              items as you cant tell the difference between the description of
+              a Sales Invoice item called 'Invoice Adjustment' and a Purchase
+              Invoice item called 'Invoice Adjustment' ..... except by trial
+              and error</para>
+            </note></para>
+
+          <para>How the Sales Invoice mappings are used is best shown by an
+          example. A very simple description of an online Sales Order Process
+          could be as follows:</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Customer Orders a Product (and Creates a Sales
+              Order)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Customer Pays for Product (via Credit Card, Internet
+              Banking etc)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Vendor confirms Payment and Dispatches the Product to the
+              Customer</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+
+          <para>Let's focus on the second part step of 3 in more
+          detail.</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The vendor has verified that the customer payment has been
+              received</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>In OFBiz Order Manager they will then look up the relevant
+              Sales Order and then click the 'Quick Ship Entire Order' button
+              to log the dispatch of the order in the system</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Quick Ship Entire Order' button is a trigger for an
+              'automatic' accounting transaction</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The transaction type that is triggered is called 'Sales
+              Invoice'</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <para>Transaction Type: Sales Invoice DR 120000 Accounts Receivable,
+          DR 410000 Discounts on Sales, DR 400000 Sales, CR 22????? Sales Tax
+          Collected</para>
+
+          <para>DR Sales is used for item promotions where product cost is
+          simply reversed. Only order promotions are coded to Discounts. The
+          Sales Tax account will be dependent on your sales tax setup. The
+          demo data posts to tax accounts by US state.</para>
+
+          <para>One of the CR (or Credit) entries for the Sales Invoice
+          transaction is created using the Sales mapping defined here in the
+          Sales Invoice (and the other is created another GL Account default
+          for 'Tax Authority GL Accounts')</para>
+
+          <para>All of the the DR (or Debit) entries for the Sales Invoice
+          transaction (except for Accounts Receivable which is comes from the
+          GL Account Type defaults) are created using the mappings defined
+          here in the Sales Invoice</para>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a Sales Invoice override mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>By default there are no Sales Invoice override mappings that
+            are configured as part of the OFBiz demo data.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Invoice Item Type' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the ' Override Revenue GL Account Id' to map it
+                to from the drop down list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Save' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new mapping will be displayed in the 'Override GL
+                Account' column in the list at the bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Sales Invoice override mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>An existing Sales Invoice override mapping cannot be updated
+            but needs to be removed and a new mapping added. If you try to add
+            an override to an item that already has an override you will get a
+            duplicate record error message.</para>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Sales Invoice override mapping?</title>
+
+            <note>
+              <para>Only the override mapping can be deleted. The default
+              mapping record cannot be deleted here (even though the Remove
+              button is displayed next to it!)</para>
+            </note>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the entry that needs the override deleted in the
+                list of Sales Invoice override mappings</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The override mapping will be removed from the 'Override
+                GL Account' column of the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Financial Account GL Account</title>
+
+          <para>The FinAccount Type GL Account (Financial Account Type / GL
+          Account Type) is used to specify the default account to be used for
+          a specific type of Financial Account. This setup will translate to
+          one side of the journal entry only.</para>
+
+          <important>
+            <para>There is a limitation that only one account can be specified
+            per Financial Account type. Currently there are 6 types of
+            Financial Account (Bank, Deposit, Investment, Gift Certificate,
+            Replenish, Service Credit) - so if you have more than one of these
+            type of accounts that you need to track separately then there
+            could be a problem.</para>
+          </important>
+
+          <para>This mapping is normally be triggered if something is paid or
+          uses a Financial Account. Using the demo data this mapping is
+          triggered when someone purchases a gift certificate, or pays money
+          into a financial account.</para>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a new Financial Account Type / GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>By default there are 4 Financial Account Type / GL Type
+            mappings that are configured as part of the OFBiz demo
+            data.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'FinAccount Type Id' from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the ' GL Account' to map it to from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new mapping will be displayed in the list at the
+                bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Financial Account Type / GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>A Financial Account Type / GL Account Type mapping can be
+            updated by modifying the GL Account only. Unlike other screens in
+            this area if the GL Account Type needs to be updated then it can
+            be done by creating a new record with the correct GL Account type
+            which will overwrite the existing record.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the entry that needs to be updated in the list of
+                Financial Account Type / GL Account Type mappings</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Modify the 'GL Account 'by using the drop down list next
+                to the GL Account field</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The updated mapping will be displayed</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Financial Account Type / GL Account
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the entry that needs to be deleted in the list of
+                Financial Account Type / GL Account Type mappings</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Product Category / GL Account</title>
+
+          <para>The Product Category GL Account is used to specify the default
+          account to be used for a specific 'Product Category' and 'Account
+          Type' combination. This setup will translate to one side of the
+          journal entry only.</para>
+
+          <para>It is used for tracking product category transactions at a
+          more detailed level. Examples could be as follows:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Tracking Accounts Receivable by Product Category in the
+              General Ledger</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Tracking Cost of Goods by Product Category in the General
+              Ledger</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Tracking Commissions paid by Product Category in the
+              General Ledger</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <para>The demo data gives an idea of the use of product categories
+          to classify or separate different products streams. If specific
+          accounting or management reporting is required at this level then
+          the General Ledger can be setup to provide this detail.</para>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a new Product Category / GL Account Type
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>By default there are no Product Category / GL Account Type
+            mappings that are configured as part of the OFBiz demo
+            data.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Account Type' from the drop down list (NOTE:
+                In other screens this field is call the 'GL Account Type
+                Id'.....)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the ' GL Account' to map it to from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Enter or look up the 'Product Category Id' to be
+                used</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new mapping will be displayed in the list at the
+                bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Product Category / GL Account type
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>A Product Category / GL Account Type mapping can be updated
+            by modifying the GL Account only. If the product category or the
+            Account Type needs to be updated then the mapping will need to be
+            deleted and then re-entered using the new product category or
+            Account Type.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the entry that needs to be updated in the list of
+                Product Category / GL Account Type mappings</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Modify the 'GL Account 'by using the drop down list next
+                to the 'GL Account' field</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The updated mapping will be displayed</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I remove a Product Category / GL Account Type
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the entry that needs to be deleted in the list of
+                Product Category / GL Account Type mappings</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the entry</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>Product GL Accounts</title>
+
+          <para>The Product GL Account is used to specify the default account
+          to be used for a specific Product' and 'Account Type' combination.
+          This setup will translate to one side of the journal entry
+          only.</para>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>Duplicate functionality .... This setup for the Product GL
+            Account can also be setup using the 'Accounts' sub menu for the
+            Product in Catalog Manager. Need to confirm whether this default
+            work like a hierarchy....eg Product GL Defaults will override
+            General Account defaults.</para>
+          </note>
+
+          <para>It is used for tracking product transactions at a more
+          detailed level. Examples could be as follows:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Tracking Accounts Receivable by Product in the General
+              Ledger</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Tracking Cost of Goods by product (or product variation)
+              in the General Ledger</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Tracking Commissions paid by Product in the General
+              Ledger</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I add a new Product / GL Account Type
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>By default there are no Product / GL Account Type mappings
+            that are configured as part of the OFBiz demo data.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the 'Account Type' from the drop down list<note>
+                    <para>In other screens this field is call the 'GL Account
+                    Type Id'....</para>
+                  </note></para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Select the ' GL Account' to map it to from the drop down
+                list</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Enter or look up the 'Product Id' to be used</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Add' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The new mapping will be displayed in the list at the
+                bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+
+            <note>
+              <para>This mapping can also be also be done via the 'Accounts'
+              sub menu for the Product. Any mapping created here will be
+              displayed under the Product 'Accounts' sub menu. Alternatively
+              any mapping created in the Product 'Accounts' sub menu will also
+              be displayed here.</para>
+            </note>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I update a Product / GL Account Type
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <para>A Product / GL Account Type mapping can be updated by
+            modifying the GL Account only. If the product needs to be updated
+            then the mapping will need to be deleted and then re-entered using
+            the new product.</para>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the entry that needs to be updated in the list of
+                Product / GL Account Type mappings</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Modify the 'GL Account 'by using the drop down list next
+                to the 'GL Account' field</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The updated mapping will be displayed</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+          </sect4>
+
+          <sect4>
+            <title>How do I delete a Product / GL Account Type
+            mapping?</title>
+
+            <orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the entry that needs to be deleted in the list of
+                Product / GL Account Type mappings</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Locate the entry that needs to be deleted in the list of
+                Product / GL Account Type mappings</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist>
+
+            <note>
+              <para>Locate the entry that needs to be deleted in the list of
+              Product / GL Account Type mappings</para>
+            </note>
+          </sect4>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Time Period</title>
+
+        <para>Time periods are a defined period of time (usually a month,
+        quarter or year) that is used to group business transactions. It is a
+        key part of any general accounting setup.</para>
+
+        <para>Time periods can be used for the definition of :</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Company Financial Year</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fiscal / Tax Periods (weeks, months, quarters)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>VAT / GST Periods</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Sales Periods</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I add a new Financial Year time period?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Using the area at the bottom of the screen labelled
+              'New'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Leave the Parent Period Id field blank<note>
+                  <para>The financial year will be the parent of other time
+                  periods eg fiscal months or GST / VAT periods</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select 'Fiscal Year' from the 'Period Type Id' drop down
+              box</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter '13' in the Period Num field <note>
+                  <para>You can use any number that does not conflict with the
+                  other time periods you want to use. We plan to define 12
+                  fiscal or tax months so will use 13 for the year</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter 'FY 2010-2011' in the Period Name field<note>
+                  <para>You can use any name you want but make sure it makes
+                  sense. This example is an abbreviation for Fiscal Year
+                  2010-2011</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select '1st April 2010' using the calendar lookup in the
+              'From Date' field</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select '1st April 2011' using the calendar lookup in the
+              'Thru Date' field<note>
+                  <para>Even though we want our financial year to end on 31st
+                  March 2011 the test used is based on less than not an equal
+                  to</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Leave the 'Is Closed' field at its default of 'No'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Create' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The new time period will now be displayed in the list of
+              open time periods.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I add a new GST/ VAT time period?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Using the area at the bottom of the screen labelled
+              'New'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the previously created financial year 'FY
+              2010-2011' in the Parent Period Id field</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select 'Fiscal Month' from the 'Period Type Id' drop down
+              box</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter '1' in the Period Num field <note>
+                  <para>This is the first of 12 periods that we want to
+                  define.</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Enter 'FM April 2010' in the Period Name field <note>
+                  <para>You can use any name you want but make sure it makes
+                  sense. This example is an abbreviation for Fiscal Month
+                  April 2010</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select '1st April 2010' using the calendar lookup in the
+              'From Date' field</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select '1st May 2010' using the calendar lookup in the
+              'Thru Date' field<note>
+                  <para>Even though we want our fiscal month to end on 30th
+                  April 2010 the test is used is based on less than not an
+                  equal to</para>
+                </note></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Leave the Is Closed field at its default of 'No'</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Create' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The new time period will now be displayed in the list of
+              open time periods.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update a time period?</title>
+
+          <para>Time periods cannot be updated via the current time periods
+          screen. If you need to amend time period details then it can be done
+          via Entity Data Maintenance in the Webtools menu.</para>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I close a time period?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>To close a time period select the 'Close' button next to
+              the time period.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The time period will be removed from the current open time
+              periods area and re-displayed in the closed time periods section
+              of the screen.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>Closing a time period is a trigger for an automatic
+            accounting transaction as follows:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Transaction Type: Period Closing</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DR ?????? (based on the GL account type mapping for
+                Profit Loss)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>CR 336000 Retained Earnings (based on GL account type
+                mapping for Retained Earnings)</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </note>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>Both sides of this accounting transaction uses the same GL
+            account type default mapping. The account mapping for 'Profit
+            Loss' is not setup as part of the demo data so this transaction
+            will not automatically post to the general ledger but will instead
+            be put in the ERROR_JOURNAL as an unposted transaction. The
+            transaction value is zero for both sides of journal...Even if it
+            does have a value do we want to move it from P and L to Equity
+            during the financial year? Normally this is done once at the end
+            of the financial year.</para>
+          </note>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Journals</title>
+
+        <para>A journal is a detailed accounting transaction that is recorded
+        (or posted) to the General Ledger. It is made up of a debit and a
+        credit component.<important>
+            <para>A journal is a detailed accounting transaction that is
+            recorded (or posted) to the General Ledger. It is made up of a
+            debit and a credit component</para>
+          </important></para>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>By default in OFBIZ a journal called 'ERROR_JOURNAL' is
+          created as part of the demo data installation.This 'ERROR_JOURNAL'
+          is referenced in the Accounting Preferences setup for 'Company'. The
+          'ERROR_JOURNAL' is used to store details of any transaction that
+          fails and cannot be posted to a general ledger account. Transactions
+          falling into error can be as the result of incomplete setup or an
+          invalid transaction (eg a transaction that should never
+          occur).</para>
+        </note>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create a journal?</title>
+
+          <para><orderedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Enter a journal name in the Gl Journal Name field (eg
+                MY_JOURNAL)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>The journal is created and will appear in the journal
+                list at the bottom of the screen</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </orderedlist></para>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>The Journal ID is automatically generated</para>
+          </note>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update a journal?</title>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the journal to be updated from the list of journals
+              at the bottom of the screen</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The journal details will be displayed on the screen</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Update the Gl Journal Name (as this is currently the only
+              field that can be updated)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Submit' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The updated journal will appear in the journal list at the
+              bottom of the screen</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I delete a journal?</title>
+
+          <para>Be careful if you need to remove an existing journal as it may
+          have transactions associated with it.</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Remove' button next to the journal that you
+              want to delete</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The journal is deleted and the screen is
+              redisplayed</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Chart of Accounts</title>
+
+        <para>OFBiz comes with a master template for a very comprehensive
+        chart of accounts. This can be found in 'Global GL Defaults' under the
+        'Accounting' tab.</para>
+
+        <para>A couple of points to note</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>you do not need to use all the accounts defined in this
+            master template (but it may be simpler to look for the accounts
+            that you can use or rename)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>you can create your own additional accounts if you dont want
+            to use the ones in the master template</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para>The chart of accounts for the default organisation (Company) is
+        built up by selecting the accounts that you want to use from the
+        global chart of accounts master template. This means that if you want
+        to create a new account then you need to create it first in the Global
+        Chart of Accounts and then link (or assign) it to the chart of
+        accounts for Company.</para>
+
+        <para>Details of the Chart of Accounts can be exported as a CSV file
+        or PDF using the buttons displayed.</para>
+
+        <important>
+          <para>You need to be careful if you do decide to create your own
+          accounts that they contain all the details required and that they
+          are linked into the relevant configuation for the setup of the GL
+          defaults. This means that if you change an account (eg Inventory) to
+          one of your own - you need to check the GL defaults setup and
+          replace any reference to the Inventory account to the one you have
+          created.</para>
+        </important>
+
+        <para>This Chart of Accounts screen is used to define the list of
+        accounts (or chart) that will be actively used by the company.For
+        example the Global chart of accounts may contain 100 different
+        accounts but only 20 need to be used for your specific business. This
+        means the you need only to create assignments to the accounts that you
+        actively want to use.</para>
+
+        <para>The Chart of Accounts is a mixture of business needs (ie being
+        able to track the information you need for your business) and tax
+        requirements (i.e. legal or government requirements necessary for
+        operating a business). The type of Chart that you setup will be
+        dependent of your business type.</para>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create a Chart of Accounts?</title>
+
+          <para>As mentioned above the chart of accounts for the default
+          organisation (Company) is built up by selecting the accounts that
+          you want to use from the global chart of accounts master template.
+          This means that if you want to create a new account then you need to
+          create it first in the Global Chart of Accounts and then link (or
+          assign) it to the chart of accounts for Company. By creating an
+          assignment to an account it is then added to the Chart of
+          Accounts.</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select the account Gl Account Id that you need from the
+              drop down box</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Create Assignment' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The account is added to the Chart of Account</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I create a Chart of Accounts?</title>
+
+          <para>Updating the Chart of Accounts will involve either creating a
+          new assignment or removing an existing one. A new assignment is
+          created using the instructions above. The added complication may be
+          that the account that you need does not exist in the Global Chart of
+          Accounts. As mentioned above it will need to be created and then
+          linked.</para>
+
+          <para>See the instructions below to remove an existing account
+          assignment.</para>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>If a completely new account is required that does not
+            already exist as part of the Global Chart of Accounts template
+            then it will need to be created as part of the Global template
+            first before it can be used as an assignment in the Organisation
+            Chart of Accounts.</para>
+          </note>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I delete a Chart of Accounts?</title>
+
+          <para>Accounts are not deleted from the Chart of Accounts - they are
+          simply no longer selected to be used.</para>
+
+          <para>It is important that you do not remove accounts that are
+          active and have already been used for transactions. Even if the net
+          balance of the account is zero then from an audit perspective then
+          you should not be removing accounts.</para>
+
+          <para>You should only be looking to remove accounts that have not
+          been used. To un-link or un-assign accounts from the default company
+          then use the Entity Data Maintenance from the Webtools menu. Look
+          for the entity 'GlAccountOrganization' and delete the record to
+          remove the link.</para>
+        </sect3>
+
+        <sect3>
+          <title>How do I update the details for an account in the Chart of
+          Accounts?</title>
+
+          <para>Details of the accounts that make up the Chart of Accounts can
+          be accessed from this screen.</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Click on the 'GL Account Id' of the account
+              required</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>The 'Edit GL Account' screen is displayed showing the
+              details of the account selected (NOTE:This screen is also
+              accessible via 'Global GL Settings / Chart of Account / Navigate
+              Accounts '</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Amend the fields required (NOTE: The GL Account Id and
+              Posted Balance fields cannot be amended)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Press the 'Update' button</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </sect3>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Accounting</title>
+
+      <para>Click Accounting in the Available Internal Organizations list to
+      open to go to the Accounting menu. The Accounting menu includes options
+      for:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Accounts Summary</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Account Reconciliation</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Account Reconciliations</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Accounting Transactions</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Accounting Transactions Entries</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reports</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Checks</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <preface>
+    <title/>
+
+    <para/>
+  </preface>
+</book>
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/accounting_en_images/Thumbs.db b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/accounting_en_images/Thumbs.db
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a5d017d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/accounting_en_images/Thumbs.db
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/accounting_en_images/main.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/accounting_en_images/main.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cd1bf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/accounting_en_images/main.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en/catalog.xml b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en/catalog.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5241df9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en/catalog.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,381 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!--
+Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one
+or more contributor license agreements.  See the NOTICE file
+distributed with this work for additional information
+regarding copyright ownership.  The ASF licenses this file
+to you under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the
+"License"); you may not use this file except in compliance
+with the License.  You may obtain a copy of the License at
+
+http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
+
+Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
+software distributed under the License is distributed on an
+"AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
+KIND, either express or implied.  See the License for the
+specific language governing permissions and limitations
+under the License.
+-->
+
+
+<book version="5.0" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+      xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+      xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+      xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+      xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+      xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+      xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title>OFBiz Catalog Manager Guide</title>
+
+    <author>
+      <personname><firstname/><surname/></personname>
+
+      <affiliation>
+        <orgname/>
+      </affiliation>
+    </author>
+
+    <pubdate/>
+  </info>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_main">
+    <title>Product Catalog overview</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Introduction</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../catalog_en_images/main.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para>The Catalog Manager creates or provides access to a variety of
+      information. Whether Products, Catalogs, or Categories, this screen
+      offers search tools and links to get you to the type of information you
+      need or are working with quickly and accurately.</para>
+
+      <para>Down the left hand column are 4 sections: 1. Search Products, 2.
+      Browse Catalogs, 3. Browse Categories, and 4. Product Categories.</para>
+    </section>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_FindCatalog">
+    <title>Catalogs</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/FindCatalog.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_FindCategory">
+    <title>Categories</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/FindCategory.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_FindProduct">
+    <title>Products</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/FindProduct.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_EditFeatureCategories">
+    <title>Features</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/EditFeatureCategories.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_FindProductPromo">
+    <title>Promos</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/FindProductPromo.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_FindPriceRules">
+    <title>Price Rules</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/FindPriceRules.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_FindProductStore">
+    <title>Stores</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/FindProductStore.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_ListParentProductStoreGroup">
+    <title>Product Store Groups</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/ListParentProductStoreGroup.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_EditKeywordThesaurus">
+    <title>Thesaurus</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/EditKeywordThesaurus.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_FindReviews">
+    <title>Reviews</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/FindReviews.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_FindProductConfigItems">
+    <title>Configurations</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/FindProductConfigItems.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_FindSubscription">
+    <title>Subscriptions</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/FindSubscription.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_ListShipmentMethodTypes">
+    <title>Shipping</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/ListShipmentMethodTypes.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para/>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="catalog_Imagemanagement">
+    <title>Image Management</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="left"
+                     fileref="../catalog_en_images/Imagemanagement.jpg"
+                     scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para>The Image Management module manages many kind of image what user
+    want. There are various functions including 'Gallery', 'Upload',
+    'Approved', 'Manage' etc.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Go to Catalog Component.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Go to Image Management.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Gallery</title>
+
+      <para>Gallery shows all images which have approved.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>Everybody can access Gallery function.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Go to 'Upload' section, Enter 'Product Id' by type or click a
+          find icon.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Optional, you can specify the size of images.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Then click 'Browse' button to choose image file(s).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Click 'Upload' button.</para>
+
+          <para/>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Upload</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Manage</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Approve</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Rejected</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Recently Approved</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Replace</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Resize</title>
+
+      <para/>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+</book>
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/EditFeatureCategories.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/EditFeatureCategories.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..496dfbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/EditFeatureCategories.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/EditKeywordThesaurus.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/EditKeywordThesaurus.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..faa5e8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/EditKeywordThesaurus.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindCatalog.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindCatalog.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1163fa2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindCatalog.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindCategory.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindCategory.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9bce1ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindCategory.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindPriceRules.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindPriceRules.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f8eeaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindPriceRules.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProduct.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProduct.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b46500d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProduct.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProductConfigItems.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProductConfigItems.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad7ba84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProductConfigItems.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProductPromo.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProductPromo.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3fc2301
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProductPromo.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProductStore.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProductStore.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5fb09b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindProductStore.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindReviews.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindReviews.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5dbb5a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindReviews.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindSubscription.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindSubscription.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5a688c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/FindSubscription.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/Imagemanagement.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/Imagemanagement.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1fe4c2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/Imagemanagement.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/ListParentProductStoreGroup.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/ListParentProductStoreGroup.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..668c8ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/ListParentProductStoreGroup.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/ListShipmentMethodTypes.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/ListShipmentMethodTypes.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a356c3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/ListShipmentMethodTypes.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/Thumbs.db b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/Thumbs.db
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..236f40a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/Thumbs.db
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/main.jpg b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/main.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e80ef8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/catalog_en_images/main.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/humanres_en/humanres.xml b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/humanres_en/humanres.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0881db4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/applications/content/data/helpdata/docbookhelp/humanres_en/humanres.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,9410 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!--
+Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one
+or more contributor license agreements.  See the NOTICE file
+distributed with this work for additional information
+regarding copyright ownership.  The ASF licenses this file
+to you under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the
+"License"); you may not use this file except in compliance
+with the License.  You may obtain a copy of the License at
+
+http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
+
+Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
+software distributed under the License is distributed on an
+"AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
+KIND, either express or implied.  See the License for the
+specific language governing permissions and limitations
+under the License.
+-->
+
+
+<book version="5.0" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+      xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+      xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+      xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+      xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+      xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+      xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title>OFBiz Human Resource Guide</title>
+
+    <pubdate>July 1, 2012</pubdate>
+  </info>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="HUMANRES_about">
+    <title>About OFBiz Human Resources</title>
+
+    <para>The people who work for your company, it's human capital, are it's
+    most important asset. Selecting a software platform that increases the
+    value of your companies human capital and delivers benefits, services and
+    opportunities to your workforce, is critical to your companies success
+    .</para>
+
+    <para>That platform must be able to accurately and reliability process
+    worker transactions, collect decision support information, and communicate
+    between management, workers and outside resources. The OFBiz Human
+    Resource application (HR App) can provide a backbone for building that
+    platform.</para>
+
+    <para>In this chapter you are introduced to the organization of this
+    document and to the key business objects that are the core to HR
+    App.</para>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Document Organization</title>
+
+      <para>Chapter numbers are used here to refer to parts of the document.
+      Chapters numbers are not displayed in the on line help version of the
+      document. Hopefully this will not be to confusing to the online
+      reader.</para>
+
+      <para>Chapter 1 is this introduction chapter. It lays out the purpose of
+      the remaining chapters and introduces some of the core HR App
+      features.</para>
+
+      <para>Chapter 2 has instructions to get you started using HR App. A
+      list, in logical order, describes some activities you can preform to get
+      up and running.</para>
+
+      <para>Chapters 3 thru 15 of provide the help documents that can be
+      invoked from the HR App in a context sensitive manner. When you work in
+      any of the HR App screens you can click on the Help icon in the menu bar
+      and the help browser will open to the relevant page in the
+      document.</para>
+
+      <para>Each feature in the <glossterm linkend="G_HR_APP_MENU">HR App
+      Menu</glossterm> has in it's own chapter, screens within the feature are
+      sections within the chapter. Introductions to the chapters describe how
+      the screens work together to implement an important application feature.
+      Each screen is pictured and documented consistently with:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A picture of the screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Breadcrumbs to show where to find the screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A brief description of the screen usage.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of fields in the screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of actions that can be performed from the
+          screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para>Chapter 16 discuses OFBiz security settings for HR App</para>
+
+      <para>Chapter 17 <link linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION">HR App
+      Intra-Application Integration</link> covers usage scenarios for other
+      OFBiz applications. The HR Application is part of the larger OFBiz back
+      office set of administrative applications and is often dependent on
+      these other applications.</para>
+
+      <para>Important terms in the documentation are defined in a Glossary. In
+      order to promote a consistent usage and understanding of terms, links to
+      the Glossary definitions are placed throughout the document.</para>
+
+      <para>Notes in the document describe behavior that is not intuitive.
+      Links between document sections are used liberally tie together concepts
+      that cross chapter boundaries. For example screens that use information
+      managed in Global HR Settings are linked to the screens where they are
+      used.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Introduction HR App</title>
+
+      <para>The HR App data design, like most of the OFBiz back office
+      administration applications, was inspired by the data models in The Data
+      Model Resource Books by Len Silverston (see <command
+      xlink:href="http://silverston.wiley.com/index.html"
+      xlink:show="new">Silverston Data Model Resource Companion
+      Site</command>.) The sections below introduces some of the concepts in
+      HR App that were derived from the models.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Positions</title>
+
+        <para>Generally positions are authorized by a budget and fulfilled by
+        people. The person may be a company employee, or contract employee.
+        Positions may be salary or hourly, fulltime or part time. Positions
+        have responsibilities.</para>
+
+        <para>Positions are defined by a type of work.</para>
+
+        <para>For example there may be 20 positions in an organization for a
+        type secretary. Each position is authorized by a budget request from a
+        department in the organization. A position can me thought of as a
+        full-time equivalent employee (FTE). So an FTE may be assigned to one
+        or more positions and position can be assigned to more then one FTEs
+        (job sharing).</para>
+
+        <para>In the HR App you can:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Create positions</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fulfill positions</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Define the responsibilities of a position</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Define a tree reporting structure between positions</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Track the positions fulfillments over time</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para>See: <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositions">Position</link></para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>People and Employees</title>
+
+        <para>People may be employees of your Company, a company you do
+        business with, or unaffiliated contract employees. Any of these people
+        may be applicants for and assigned to positions in your
+        Company.</para>
+
+        <para>If OFBiz a <glossterm linkend="G_PERSON">person</glossterm>is a
+        type of <glossterm linkend="G_PARTY">party</glossterm>. One of the
+        strengths of OFBiz is the rich set of features it has build up to
+        manage information and relationships for parties. This makes OFBiz a
+        great platform for HR services because managing people and
+        organizations is a core OFBiz technology.</para>
+
+        <para>In the HR App you can:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>View employee profiles</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Manage recruitment</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Create employees</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Track an employees performance, positions, skills,
+            qualifications, training, and leave</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para>See: <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplLeaves">Employees</link></para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Employments</title>
+
+        <para>An employee is a person who works for your company. The terms
+        and history of this relationship between this person and your company
+        are managed in the Employments feature. Employments track the
+        benefits, pay preferences, pay history, unemployment claims and
+        agreements for the employment.</para>
+
+        <para>In the HR App you can:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Create employments</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Track employment benefits, pay history, unemployment claims
+            and employment agreements</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para>See: <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositions">Employments</link></para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Department Organization</title>
+
+        <para>Many companies organize departments<footnote>
+            <para>There is no special meaning attached to the word department.
+            It is used to describe any sub-division of a business
+            organization.</para>
+          </footnote> in a tree structure. Your Companies organizational tree
+        is shown on the main page of the HR App.</para>
+
+        <para>In the HR App you can:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Add and remove departments</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>View department profiles</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Assign positions to departments</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Manage department employments</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Getting Started</title>
+
+    <para>The Getting Started chapter discusses the common usage pattern
+    followed in the HR App UI, offers some links to general OFBiz getting
+    started documentation and most importantly provides a list of activities
+    you can perform to get the HR App up and running.</para>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>The User Interface</title>
+
+      <para>This guide was written based on the OFBiz trunk in the Summer of
+      2012 using the default Tomahawk theme. The information should be useful
+      for users of earlier versions and other themes. The screen shots may
+      look different from what you see in your version but not so much so that
+      you can not understand the gist of the features.</para>
+
+      <para>With close to 100 screens, some which link to applications outside
+      of the HR App, it is easy for a new user to get lost. Knowing the common
+      UI pattern used in HR App, as described here, will help you stay
+      oriented.</para>
+
+      <para>In OFBiz screens are collection of graphical user interface (GUI)
+      elements that provide an intuitive way to interact with applications. In
+      the back office applications, like Accounting, Marketing and Human
+      Resource, menus are the primary method of navigation between GUI
+      screens. The Application menu is the top level menu and links to a back
+      office administration application. Each application has an application
+      sub menu that is the top level menu within the application.</para>
+
+      <para>The HR App Menu in the diagram, which we will refer as the HR App
+      menu in this document, is such a sub menu. The pattern of navigation
+      from the HR App menu is depicted in the diagram below.</para>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/OFBizMainScreen.gif"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para>Typically, but not always, HR App Menu items take their name from
+      an important application <glossterm
+      linkend="G_ENTITY">entity</glossterm>. For example you have Employees,
+      Employments, Employee Positions etc. All important information subjects
+      in human resource departments.</para>
+
+      <para>Many of these menu items open a screen, we will call a <glossterm
+      linkend="G_MAIN_SEARCH_SCREEN">Main Search Screen</glossterm>, the top
+      layout in the above diagram. It has three screenlets 1. A link to a
+      screen for creating a new entity 2. A Search Options screenlet for
+      building a search filter 3. A search results screenlet that has columns
+      with navigation widgets to open other application areas.</para>
+
+      <para>One of these navigation columns will open a screen we will call a
+      Feature Menu Screen. It has menu items for displaying / editing the
+      feature entity and it's supporting entities. The lower layout in the
+      diagram is an example of a Feature Menu Screen that shows a default
+      screen with summary information about the entity. The default screen is
+      sometimes an edit screen where the main entity can be edited and
+      updated.</para>
+
+      <para>HR App Features that follow this pattern include:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmployee">Employees</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmployments">Employments</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="HUMANRES_ListEmplPositions">Employee
+          Position</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="HUMANRES_FindPerfReviews">Performance
+          Review</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartySkills">Skills</link>
+          <footnote>
+              <para>This entity does not link to a Feature Menu Screen. Entity
+              editing and update are done in the Search Results.</para>
+            </footnote></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartyQuals">Qualifications</link>
+          <superscript>1</superscript></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_FindJobRequisitions">Recruitment</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmploymentApps">Employment
+          Applications</link> <superscript>1</superscript></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartyResumes">Resumes</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplLeaves">Leave</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Getting Started With OFBiz</title>
+
+      <para>If you are just getting started with OFBiz you will want to read
+      the <command
+      xlink:href="https://cwiki.apache.org/OFBADMIN/demo-and-test-setup-guide.html"
+      xlink:show="new">Demo and Test Setup Guide</command>. If you are
+      reviewing the application you will likely want to run the load-demo ant
+      task for this purpose. This will load the seen HR data for Global HR
+      Settings plus demo users and selected user HR data.</para>
+
+      <para>If you are setting up for production you should have read <command
+      xlink:href="https://cwiki.apache.org/confluence/display/OFBTECH/Apache+OFBiz+Technical+Production+Setup+Guide#ApacheOFBizTechnicalProductionSetupGuide-InitialDataLoading"
+      xlink:show="new">Apache OFBiz Technical Production Setup
+      Guide</command>. Follow the instructions on Initial Data Loading. If you
+      run the ant task load-seed the data for the HR Portlet, <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_EditSkillType">Global HR2 Settings</link>, and the
+      Human Resource security settings admin, view, create, update, and delete
+      are loaded.</para>
+
+      <para>If you are going to be writing pay checks you will need to set up
+      the Accounting feature, see <command
+      xlink:href="https://cwiki.apache.org/confluence/display/OFBIZ/Quick+Start+-+Basic+Accounting+Setup"
+      xlink:show="new">Quick Start - Basic Accounting Setup.</command></para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Getting Started With HR App</title>
+
+      <para>Here is a list of activities you can follow that will help you get
+      HR App up and running in your company.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Reference Data</title>
+
+        <para>Reference data in the HR App are the items used in
+        drop-down-list for the purpose of classifying other information or
+        limiting user selections. These list are managed in <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_EditSkillType">Global HR Settings</link>, review all
+        of the information in that feature to make sure the list items make
+        sense for your business. Some list items in HR App are not exposed in
+        Global HR Settings. To customize those list use <link
+        linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION_ENTITY_DATA_MAINT">Entity Data
+        Maintenance</link> described in the HR App Intra-Application
+        Integration chapter.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>People</title>
+
+        <para>In this section we will set up information about people. After
+        completing this section you will be able to answer questions about
+        people and their skills, qualifications and experience.</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Add employees and people who may be applicants or contract
+            employees. You add employees using the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmployee">New Employee</link> screen. Add
+            other people to your system using the Party Manager application.
+            See HR App Intra-Application Integration <link
+            linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION_CREATE_PERSON">Create
+            Person</link>.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Add the skills and qualifications for the people you added
+            in the prior step. For employees you can use the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeSkills">Skills</link> menu item and
+            <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeQuals">Qualifications</link>
+            menu item in the Employees Feature Menu Screen. For non employees
+            (and employees) you can use the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeSkills">Skills</link> and <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeQuals">Qualifications</link>
+            features.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Add employee resumes using <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditPartyResume">Resume</link> feature.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Add training classes in the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_TrainingCalendar">Training</link> feature and
+            class participants</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Department Organization</title>
+
+        <para>In this section we will set up your organization structure using
+        the GUI tree interface in the <link linkend="HUMANRES_main">Main
+        Window</link>.</para>
+
+        <para><itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>In the HR App your organization structure is a tree built
+              of <link linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION">internal
+              organizations.</link> You will create the internal organizations
+              using the Party application and then link them together using
+              the HR App GUI Tree in <link linkend="HUMANRES_main">Main
+              Window</link>. See <link
+              linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION_CREATE_INTERNAL_ORG">Create
+              Internal Organization</link> to learn how to create Internal
+              Organizations.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>After creating your Internal Organizations link them
+              together into an organization structure using the context menu
+              in the tree widget. Right click on an organization icon. Select
+              a internal organization from the drop-down list. The
+              organization is added to the tree beneath the selected
+              node</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist></para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Employments</title>
+
+        <para>Now that we have people and organizations in our application we
+        can bring them together in an employment. An employment is a
+        relationship between person (who must be an employee) to an internal
+        organization. The employment relationship tracks information about
+        employees benefits, preferences and employment agreement.</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Create an employment using the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmployment">Employments</link>
+            feature.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Add <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditPartyBenefits">Benefits</link> and <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditPayrollPreferences">Preferences</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>You can establish a formal agreement for the employment in
+            the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditAgreementEmploymentAppls">Agreement
+            Employment Applications</link> screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Positions</title>
+
+        <para>At this point we have people and organizations and an employment
+        agreement that specifies the terms of the employment. It's time to
+        give the employee something to do so in this section you will set up
+        positions (jobs). As you set up your positions you can add
+        responsibilities and reporting structure.</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Add jobs in the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPosition">Employee Position</link>
+            feature.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>You can list the responsibilities of a position over time
+            using the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionResponsibilities">Responsibilities</link>
+            screen.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>You can set up a reporting structure for positions using the
+            <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionReportingStructs">Reporting
+            Structure</link> screen.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After you have created a job you bind it to a person (who be
+            an employee or a contract employee) using <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionFulfillments">Fulfillments</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Recruiting</title>
+
+        <para>The business is growing and you need help. Hear is how you can
+        recruit new employees.</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>User the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_FindJobRequisitions">Recruitment</link> feature
+            to requisition new jobs.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After a requisition is created you post the job using <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_FindInternalJobPosting">Internal Job
+            Posting</link>.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Applicants can apply for positions in the <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmploymentApps">Employment
+            Applications.</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Security</title>
+
+        <para>HR App display and usage is controlled by OFBiz security which
+        depending on a users role allows or prevents a user from seeing
+        information in or taking action on HR App features. General
+        information about Security is discussed in the <link
+        linkend="SECURITY">Security</link> chapter.</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="HUMANRES_main">
+    <title>Main Window</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="center"
+                     fileref="../humanres_en_images/MainCompanyTreeView.jpg"
+                     format="jpg" scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs -</emphasis> Applications &gt;
+    HR</para>
+
+    <para>The Main window is the entry point into the HR App and displays the
+    Company tree view for navigating to key HR App items.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold"> Nodes In the Company Tree</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>There are three node types in the tree, each identified by a
+    different icon. The top of the tree represents your Company, the highest
+    level in the HR App organization. The Company and departments under the
+    Company can have children departments or positions. Under positions are
+    the people who fulfill the position.</para>
+
+    <para>See: <command
+    xlink:href="https://cwiki.apache.org/OFBENDUSER/apache-ofbiz-business-setup-guide.html#ApacheOFBizBusinessSetupGuide-generalCompanySetup"
+    xlink:show="new">OFBiz General Company Setup</command> for directions on
+    replacing the root "Your Company Name Here [Company]" with the name of
+    your company.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Navigate the HR Organization to view departments, positions and
+        people</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Add or remove a department</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Add a person</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Quickly open the profile of any item in the tree</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If the item is a position you can add a person to fulfill the
+        position</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Click on an tree node to open the profile view of the item
+        represented by the node</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Right click on a node to open a pop up context menu</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Context Menu Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Right click on a node in the Company tree to open the context
+    menu.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Organization Node Options</emphasis></para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Add Employee Position: Select to open the <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPosition">Employee Position</link>
+        screenlet</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Add Internal Organization: Select opens a drop down list of
+        internal organization Id's. Select an id and click create. The
+        organization name is added below the current node.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Remove Internal Organization: Select Remove Internal
+        Organization. You are prompted to confirm. Click OK. The organization
+        is remove from the tree.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Position Node Option:</emphasis> Add Person:
+    Select to open the <link
+    linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionFulfillments">Add Position
+    Fulfillment</link> screenlet.</para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="HUMANRES_FindEmployee">
+    <title>Employees</title>
+
+    <para>The Employees feature manages information about people who have an
+    <glossterm linkend="G_EMPLOYMENT">employment</glossterm> relationship with
+    your Company or one of it's departments. This features include an
+    <glossterm linkend="G_EMPLOYEE">employee</glossterm> Profile, a display of
+    all employee related information in a single screen and facilities for
+    managing employee skills, qualifications, training, leave and payroll
+    history.</para>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Find Employee</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeesMain.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis> - HR Human Resources
+      &gt; Employees</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis> - In the Employees screen
+      you can create a new employee, search for an existing employee and view
+      a list of employees. Selecting an employee in the list opens the
+      employees profile and other screens associated with the employee. The
+      Employees screen is divided in three screenlets, they are described in
+      the following sections.</para>
+
+      <sect2 xml:id="HUMANRES_NewEmployee">
+        <title>New Employee</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeeNewEmployee.png"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources
+        &gt; Employees - Click New Employee</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis> - Create a new
+        Employee.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis> - Click so save a new
+        Employee.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Find an employee</title>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs - </emphasis>Human Resources
+        &gt; Employees</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> Find an employee using
+        search criteria.</para>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>Only Employees Are Found.</para>
+
+          <para>Use the Party Manager application to get information about
+          people who are not employees.</para>
+
+          <para>To do this: In the Applications menu select Party, enter
+          search criteria to search for the person, to return the HR App
+          select HR from the Applications menu.</para>
+        </note>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Party ID - Must be the id of a party who is an
+            employee.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>User Login - The identifier used to login to OFBiz</para>
+
+            <note>
+              <para>An employee may have zero or more user logins.</para>
+            </note>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Last name - Employee last name</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>First name - Employee first name</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Actions are described from the left to right, top to bottom of
+        the Find an employee screen.</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Contact Information radio buttons - Displays or hides
+            additional criteria fields.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Lookup Party button (title bar): Opens a list of employees
+            based on the criteria entered.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Hide Fields / Show Lookup Fields button (title bar): Hides /
+            shows the filter fields in the "Find an employee"
+            screenlet.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Lookup Party icon (right of Party Id field): Opens a pop up
+            search form that finds a Party Id. Use the form to find employees
+            by id or first and last name when you do not know the employee id.
+            Remember the search is only for employees and not all people are
+            employees.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Lookup Party button(button center of "Find an employee"
+            footer): Opens a list of employees using the criteria in the "Find
+            an employee" screenlet (same as Lookup Party in the title
+            bar).</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Show all records button: Opens a list of all employees (same
+            as selecting Lookup Party without entering a criteria).</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Parties found</title>
+
+        <para>This section list the employees found by the Find an employee
+        search.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>PARTY ID: The unique identifier for the employee.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>USER LOGIN: The user login for the employee. May be
+            "(None)", "(Many)" in the case where an employee has no or more
+            then one login.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>NAME: The last name, first name of the employee.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>TYPE: The party type of the employee. Typically
+            "Person"</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Party Id link (left column in Parties Found list): Opens the
+            employees profile.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>DETAILS button (right column in Parties Found list): Opens
+            the employees profile (same as clicking the Party Id link).</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EmployeeProfile">
+      <title>Profile (Employee)</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeeProfile.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para>The Profile screen for an employee is a collection of screenlets
+      each presenting information about a different aspect of the employee. It
+      is the first item on a menu that has screens for other information
+      related to the employee.</para>
+
+      <para>Usage</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>View a summary of information on an employee in a single
+          screen</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update Personal Information</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>View, create, update, and expire employee contact
+          information</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>View and create a list of related accounts</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>View training records</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>View employment information</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>View, create, and update login id's, update security
+          group</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>View and create party attributes</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Upload party content</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>View and create notes</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Each of the Profile screenlets are described
+      in the sections that follow.</emphasis></para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Personal Information Screenlet</title>
+
+        <para>The Personal Information screenlet has only a few of the fields
+        available in OFBiz for recording information about an employee. You
+        can collect and edit additional information by clicking the Update
+        link in the title bar.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Party Id: The id of a employee associated with the profile
+            information</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Name: The first and last name of the employee</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Comments: A comment associated with the employee</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>External Id: The id of an external login system e.g. An LDAP
+            server</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Status ID: Available status: Enabled, Disabled, and
+            Assigned.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Action </emphasis>Update title bar button:
+        Edit Personal Information</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Contact Information Screenlet</title>
+
+        <para>The Contact Information screenlet summarizes contact details for
+        multiple channels including:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Electronic Address</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Postal Address</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Phone Number</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Email Address</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Internet IP Address</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Internet Domain Name</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Web URL/Address</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Internal Party Note</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>LDAP Address</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Create New - Opens the Create New Contact Information
+            screen</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Update - Click to change information or add a contact
+            purpose. You can add a contact purpose when you create and Email
+            Address, Phone Number or LDAP Address. Use Update to add a contact
+            purpose to Postal Address or Web URL/Address. You can not add a
+            purpose to Electronic Address, Internet IP Address, Internet
+            Domain Name and Internal Party Note</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Expire - Click to sets the through date (not visible the
+            user) on the contact item. The item is no longer displayed in
+            Contact Information.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>lookup:anywho.com (only in Phone Number)- Click opens
+            http://www.anywho.com/reverse-lookup in a new browser
+            window</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Look up White pages (only in Phone Number) - Click opens
+            http://www.whitepages.com/search in a new browser window</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Send Mail (only in Email Address) - Opens a new
+            communications event. For help see Send Email in the OFBiz Support
+            Apps document.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>open page in new window (only in Web URL/Address) - Click to
+            open the address in a new browser window.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>List Related Accounts Screenlet</title>
+
+        <para>Accounts are created in the SFA Manger application See SFA
+        Manager Accounts SFA. Listing an account in the Profile provides a
+        quick link in the HR App to the profile of the account.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold"> To Add a Related
+        Account:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click Create New to add an account to your Profile</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click the Lookup Icon</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Select from the list of Id's.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click Add</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The Account is added to the list of Related Accounts in your
+            profile.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis> Click the From Party Id
+        field (in brackets and bold) to open the Related Account
+        profile.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Training Screenlet</title>
+
+        <para>The Training screenlet displays a list of classes that have been
+        assigned to this person.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>From Date - Start date time for training</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Thru Date - End date time for training</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Training Class Type - Name describing class category. See :
+            <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditTrainingTypes">Training Class
+            Type</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Approver Status - One of Applied, Approved, Assigned,
+            Proposed or Rejected</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Approver Party - Person with authority to approve
+            training</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para>For more information see: <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_TrainingCalendar">Training</link></para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Current Employment information Screenlet</title>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> This screenlet shows
+        the employee's department, position and salary.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Company - The organization unit to which the employee is
+            assigned</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Position - Position(s) held by the employee</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Salary - Employee salary</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Company [some text]: Click to open Company profile<note>
+                <para>The Profile opened is in the Party Manager application.
+                To return to the HR App select Applications &gt; HR</para>
+              </note></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Position [some text]: Click to open position Summary
+            screen.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>User Name(s) Screenlet</title>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> The User Name(s)
+        screenlet manages user logins and security settings. Logins give a
+        user the ability log into an OFBiz application while security settings
+        control what the user can do while logged on.</para>
+
+        <para>Users with create privileges in the Party Manager application
+        have the ability to create user logins and then to manage the login
+        password and security setting. Others will see a list user login names
+        and status (ENABLED or DISABLED).</para>
+
+        <para>Users may have no user login or multiple logins. Each login has
+        it's own set of security settings so multiple logins provide
+        flexibility in controlling a users connection to OFBiz
+        applications.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Create New text in title bar: Opens the Create User Login
+            screenlet.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Edit button: Opens the Edit Login screen where a user can
+            update the login or change the password.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Security Groups button: Opens the
+            AddUserLoginToSecurityGroup screenlet where you can add, update or
+            delete <glossterm linkend="G_SKILL_GROUP">Security
+            Groups</glossterm>.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Party Attribute(s) Screenlet</title>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> Party Attributes
+        provide an ability for users to attach arbitrary names and values to
+        people. These name value pairs can be used in different ways to extend
+        the information collected about a person without having to make
+        changes to the database.</para>
+
+        <para>For example, a name could be added "On Company Team" with a
+        value "Football". A report could be created for employees grouped by
+        Company Team.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Create New title bar button: Opens the Party Attribute
+            screenlet where you can create name value pairs for the
+            party.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Edit button: Click to open Party Attribute screenlet where
+            you can update name value pairs for the party.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Party Content Screenlet</title>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> The Party Content
+        screenlet provides a means to load content to the OFBiz Content
+        Manager application. You can use this feature to load your picture for
+        display in your profile.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Action -</emphasis> To load an image for
+        display in the Personal Information screenlet:</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click Browse and select an image using the native file
+            search</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>In the drop-down list select Logo Image URL</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>In Is Public select Yes</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Click Upload.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+
+        <para>After a screen refresh the selected image will appear above
+        Party Id in the Personal Information as Personal Image</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Content Id - A unique content identifier linking the
+            employee to the content</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Content Type - One of Internal Content, User Defined
+            Content, Logo Image URL, or Vendor Shipping Info</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Content Name - A user defined name for the content</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Content Description - A user defined description of the
+            content</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Content mime type - One of application/octet-stream,
+            application/pdf, image/gif, image/jpeg, text/html, text/plain, or
+            text/x-diff</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Status- One of Available Deactivated, Final Draft, In
+            Progress, Initial Draft, Published, or Revised Draft</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Content Id button: Opens the dedicated Party Content
+            screen.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>View button: Click to open content. Content will open in a
+            viewer appropriate for the content type.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Remove button: Deletes the record</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Browse button: Opens system file upload</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Upload button: Uploads file to OFBiz runtime &gt; upload
+            folder. A record is created in Content Manager.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>You can manage the uploaded content in OFBiz content manager.
+          To find the content:</para>
+
+          <orderedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>In the main Applications menu select Content.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>In the Content Manager Menu select Content</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>In the content id filed enter the content id as displayed
+              in the Party Content list.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Click Find</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </orderedlist>
+        </note>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Notes Screenlet</title>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> In the Notes screenlet
+        you can create and display notes. Notes may not be updated after they
+        are created.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Note Name - Required name for the note. The text of the node
+            is to the right of the name.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>By - Name of the person who created the note.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>At - Date time note was entered</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_ListEmployments">
+      <title>Employments</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeeEmployments.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employees &gt; Click Lookup Party &gt; Click Details &gt; Click Menu
+      Item Employments</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> This screen displays a
+      convenient list of <glossterm
+      linkend="G_EMPLOYMENT">Employments</glossterm> for an employee, however
+      usually a person will have only a single employment. You can navigate to
+      the employee profile to view summary information on the employee or to
+      the employment edit page in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmployments">Employments</link> feature to edit
+      the employment.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION">Internal
+          Organization</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party Id - The <glossterm linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+          Id</glossterm> of the employee.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - Hire date</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Last day of employment.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_TERMINATION_REASON">Termination
+          Reason</glossterm> Id - The reason for the. Reasons are defined in
+          Global HR Settings <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTerminationReasons">Termination
+          Reasons</link>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_TERMINATION_TYPE">Termination
+          Type</glossterm> Id - The type of termination. Types are defied in
+          Global HR Settings <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTerminationTypes"><link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTerminationTypes">Termination
+          Type</link></link>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>DemoEmployee button: Opens the PROFILE screen<note>
+              <para>This action is the same as clicking on the Profile menu
+              item adjacent to this item.</para>
+            </note></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Edit button: Opens the Edit Employment screen in the <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmployments">Employments</link>
+          feature.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_ListEmplPositions">
+      <title>Employee Position</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeeListEmplPositions.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employees &gt; Click Lookup Party &gt; In Parties Found Click Details
+      &gt; Click Menu Item Employee Position</para>
+
+      <para>Usage - This screen displays a convenient list of <glossterm
+      linkend="G_POSITION">positions</glossterm> for an employee. Employee
+      positions are created and managed in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPosition">Employee Position</link> feature.
+      From this screen you can navigate to the employee position profile
+      screen of the employee to view summary information on the employees
+      position. Click the link button in the party id column to navigate to
+      the profile of the <link linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION">internal
+      organization</link> authorized to fill the position.</para>
+
+      <para>To edit position information see <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPosition">Edit Employee Position</link></para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status ID - One of Active/Open, Inactive/Closed or Planed
+          For.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm><glossterm linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party
+          Id</glossterm></glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_BUDGET_ID">Budget Id</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_BUDGET_SEQUENCE_ID">Budget Item Sequence
+          Id</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_EMPLOYEE_POSITION_TYPE">Employee
+          Position Type</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Estimate From Date - May be used for budgeting</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Estimate Thru Date - May be used for budgeting</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_SALARY_FLAG">Salary
+          Flag</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_EXEMPT_FLAG">Exempt
+          Flag</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_FULLTIME_FLAG">Fulltime
+          Flag</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_TEMPORY_FLAG">Temporary
+          Flag</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Actual From Data - May be used for financial and regulatory
+          reporting</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Actual Thru Data - May be used for financial and regulatory
+          reporting</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Position Id text link: Click to open the Summary
+          screen (profile) in the Employee Position feature for the employee
+          position</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party Id button: Click to open profile screen of the
+          organization assigned to the position</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeSkills">
+      <title>Skills</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeeSkills.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employees &gt; Click Lookup Party &gt; In Parties Found Click Details
+      &gt; Click Menu Item Skills</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> You can assign a skill to
+      an employee or organization in the Skills screen. Assign numeric values
+      to <link linkend="G_YEARS_EXPERIENCE">Years Experience</link>, <link
+      linkend="G_RATING">Rating</link> and <link linkend="G_SKILL_LEVEL">Skill
+      Level</link> to provide objective criteria for discriminating between
+      resources with the same skill. These attributes can be used in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartySkills">Skills</link> feature to locate
+      resources with a needed skill.</para>
+
+      <para>You manage skill in <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditSkillType">Global
+      HR Settings</link> by creating new skill groups and skills or editing
+      existing skills. You can search for employees skills as well as manage
+      employee skills in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartySkills">Skills</link> feature.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">. Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Person Id - The unique identifier of the person assigned the
+          skill.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Skill - The skill name from <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditSkillType">Global HR Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_YEARS_EXPERIENCE">Years Experience</link> - A
+          numeric value identifying the number of years of experience.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_RATING">Rating</link> - A numeric value that
+          can be used as a filter for finding and reporting on skills in the
+          company.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_SKILL_LEVEL">Skill Level</link> - A numeric
+          value that can be used as a filter for finding and reporting on
+          skills in the company</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button - Click to add a skill to an employees list of
+          skills</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button - Click to update changes Years Experience,
+          Rating and Skill Level</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button - Click to delete a skill from the employee's
+          skill list. Deleted skills can not</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeQuals">
+      <title>Qualifications</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeeEditEmployeeQuals.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employees &gt; Click Lookup Party &gt; In Parties Found Click Details
+      &gt; Click Menu Item Qualifications</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>You can assign a <link
+      linkend="G_PARTY_QUALIIFICATION_TYPE">qualification</link> to a person
+      or an organization to track their ability to perform a job.</para>
+
+      <para>You can search and also assign qualifications in the
+      Qualifications feature. You can manage qualification groups and types in
+      Global Settings Qualification Type.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link
+          linkend="G_PARTY_QUALIIFICATION_TYPE">Qualification</link> - The
+          Qualification name.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The start date of the qualification.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Qualification Desc - A user defined description of the
+          qualification.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Title - A user defined title of the qualification</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status - One of completed, deferred or incomplete may be used
+          to indicate if state of the qualification for the party.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Verify Status - Indicates if the validity of the qualification
+          has be checked.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The end date of the qualification i.e. The
+          expiration date of a drivers license</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to save changes to the
+          qualification.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the qualification. The
+          qualification is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>Instead of deleting a qualification it is better to set the
+            thru date.</para>
+          </note>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to create a new qualification for the
+          party.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeTrainings">
+      <title>Training</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeeTraining.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employees &gt; Click Lookup Party &gt; In Parties Found Click Details
+      &gt; Click Menu Item Training</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage </emphasis>- This screen presents a
+      list of a persons training status. Training is managed in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindTrainingStatus">Training Status</link> screen in
+      the Calendar feature. Classes classes can be created and participants
+      assigned in <link linkend="HUMANRES_TrainingCalendar">Training
+      Calendar</link>.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party Id - The unique identifier for person
+          associated with the training list.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Request Id - The identifier for the request for this
+          person to attend the training.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Class Type - The name of the training class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Work Effort Id - This field can be ignored by the user.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The date and time the training starts</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The date and time the training ends.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status - The approval status for the person for this class.
+          May be one of</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reason - Reason for training</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party Id button: Click to open the employees profile
+          in the OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party button: Click to open the approvers profile in
+          the OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para>The OFBiz Party Manager application is separate from the HR App.
+        To return to the HR App Select HR from the Applications menu. You will
+        be returned to the main <link linkend="HUMANRES_main">Main</link>
+        screen.</para>
+      </warning>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeLeaves">
+      <title>Leave</title>
+
+      <para>Payroll history displays a list of invoices</para>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeeEditEmployeeLeaves.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employees &gt; Click Lookup Party &gt; In Parties Found Click Details
+      &gt; Click Menu Item Training Leave</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>An employee can use this
+      screen to request leave. The List Leave screenlet is a list all of the
+      leave records for the employee. An employee can also create a leave
+      request in the Add Employee Leave screenlet.</para>
+
+      <para>Any user with Human Resource Employee permission can view and
+      request leave for any other employee. Only users with Human Resource
+      Approver permission can update or approve a leave request.</para>
+
+      <para>Leave request are managed in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplLeaves">Leave</link> feature where in addition
+      to requesting leave an approver may review and approve assigned request.
+      Leave types and reasons are managed by the administrator in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global Settings Employee Leave
+      Type</link> feature.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Type Id - The name of a leave type. Leave types are
+          defined in <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global
+          Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The data the leave starts.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The data the leave ends.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - The <link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+          id</link> of the <link linkend="G_PERSON">person</link> with
+          authority to approve the leave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - A user entered description of the leave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Reason Type - The name of a leave type reason. Leave
+          types reasons are defined in <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to save changes to a leave record.<note>
+              <para>You must have update or administrator permission to update
+              a leave request.</para>
+            </note></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Create button: Click to create a leave
+          request.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party Id button: Click to open the employees profile
+          in the OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party button: Click to open the approvers profile in
+          the OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+
+          <warning>
+            <para>The OFBiz Party Manager application is separate from the HR
+            App. To return to the HR App Select HR from the Applications menu.
+            You will be returned to the main Main screen.</para>
+          </warning>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_PayrollHistory">
+      <title>Payroll History</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeePayrollHistory.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employees &gt; Click Lookup Party &gt; In Parties Found Click Details
+      &gt; Click Menu Item Payroll History</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> The Payroll History
+      screen displays a list of invoices for the employee. Generally these are
+      payroll or commission invoices. The invoices life cycle from creation
+      through payment is done in the Accounting application.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Invoice ID - The distance identifier of the invoice. This
+          number can be used to find the invoice in the Accounting
+          application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Invoice Type - Identifies the type of invoice. This will
+          typically be Payroll.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Invoice Date - Date the invoice was created.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Invoice Status - Status may be In-Processes (can be edited),
+          Approved (has been reviewed, can not be edited), Ready (post to GL),
+          Paid (post to GL)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - A user entered description of the
+          invoice.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Party - The employee identified by the <link
+          linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party id</link> . The invoice is in effect from
+          the employee to the company.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>To Party - The party the invoice is to. For payroll this will
+          typically by your company identified by the <link
+          linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party id</link> .</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Total - Amount paid. For a payroll invoice this will typically
+          be less then the gross amount of the invoice due to deductions for
+          taxes and benefits etc</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Outstanding Amount - Any unpaid amount due on the
+          invoice.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Invoice Id - Click to open the invoices Overview screen in the
+          Accounting application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Party - Click to open the Fin. History screen for the
+          From Party party id the OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>To Party - Click to open the Fin. History screen for the To
+          Party party id the OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para>The OFBiz Accounting and Party Manager applications are separate
+        from the HR App. To return to the HR App Select HR from the
+        Applications menu. You will be returned to the main Main
+        screen.</para>
+      </warning>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Invoice Overview</title>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>Description of the Invoice Overview screen is outside the
+          scope of this document.</para>
+        </note>
+
+        <screenshot>
+          <mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/AccountingSetInvoiceStatus.jpg"
+                         scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject>
+        </screenshot>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Party Financial History</title>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>Description of the Party Financial History screen is outside
+          the scope of this document.</para>
+        </note>
+
+        <screenshot>
+          <mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/PartyManagerPartyFinancialHistory.jpg"
+                         scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject>
+        </screenshot>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Employments</title>
+
+    <para>An employment is a relationship between a person and your Company.
+    The HR App tracks employment benefits, pay history, unemployment claims
+    and employment agreements for each employed person.</para>
+
+    <para>When you create new employee using the <link
+    linkend="HUMANRES_NewEmployee">New Employee</link> screen the employee
+    relationship is created for you automatically. If there is an a person
+    that was entered into the application by some other means you will have to
+    create the employee relationship manually in the Party Manager
+    application.</para>
+
+    <para>The employment record includes the start and end date of the
+    employment. When the employment ends you include the type of termination
+    and reason. For example and employee may have been let go for poor
+    performance. The type would be fired the reason incompetence.</para>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindEmployments">
+      <title>Search Employments</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentSearch.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employments</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Use the Employments
+      screen to create an <glossterm
+      linkend="G_EMPLOYMENT">employment</glossterm>, search for an existing
+      employments. Use Search Options to refine the search. Selecting an
+      employment from the list opens the Edit Employment screen.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION">Internal
+          Organization</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party Id - The <glossterm linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+          id</glossterm> of the employee.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - Hire date</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Last day of employment.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Termination Reason Id - The reason for the. Reasons are
+          defined in Global HR Settings <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTerminationReasons">Termination
+          Reasons</link>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Termination Type Id - The type of termination. Types are
+          defied in Global HR Settings <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTerminationTypes"><link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTerminationTypes">Termination
+          Type</link></link>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Employment button: Click to open the screen to create a
+          new employment for a person or organization.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list of employments. Displays a list
+          of employments in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party Id button: Click to open the employees <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EmployeeProfile">Profile</link>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Edit button: Opens the Edit Employment screen. This is a
+          gateway to the other employment screens: benefits, pay history,
+          unemployment claims and employment agreements</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>New Employment</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentNewEmployment.png"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources
+        &gt; Employments Click New Employment</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> Create a New Employment
+        relationship between and <glossterm
+        linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION">internal organization</glossterm>
+        and an <glossterm linkend="G_EMPLOYEE">employee.</glossterm> Sets the
+        start date for the employment.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><glossterm linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION">internal
+            organization</glossterm></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Employee Party Id - The <glossterm
+            linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party id</glossterm> of the employee.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>From Date - Hire date</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Action - </emphasis>Create button: Click
+        to create the employment.</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmployment">
+      <title>Edit Employments</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentEdit.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employments &gt; In the Search Results Click Edit</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>This screen is used to
+      create or edit and update an employment. In the Main Search Screen it is
+      opened in create mode by clicking the New Employment button or update
+      mode by clicking the Edit button in Search Results.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - Hire date</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Last day of employment.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Termination Reason Id - The reason for the. Reasons are
+          defined in Global HR Settings <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTerminationReasons">Termination
+          Reasons</link>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Termination Type Id - The type of termination. Types are
+          defied in Global HR Settings <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTerminationTypes"><link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTerminationTypes">Termination
+          Type</link></link>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action - </emphasis> Update button: Click to
+      create or update changes to a employment record.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditPartyBenefits">
+      <title>Party Benefits</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentCreatePartyBenefit.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employments &gt; In the Search Results Click Edit &gt; Click Party
+      Benefits</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Add an employee benefit</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update an employee benefit</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete an employee benefit</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>At this time Party benefits are not integrated with the OFBiz
+        Accounting application.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Benefit Type Id - A name describing the benefit. See <link
+          linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION_ENTITY_DATA_MAINT">Entity Data
+          Maintenance</link> to manage Benefit Type Id .</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The date the benefit ends.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Period Type Id - The time period covered by the cost.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Cost - Cost of the benefit over the Period Type.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Actual Employer Paid Percentage</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Available Time - Use to track time off for vacation, sick
+          leave and other benefits of that nature</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>Use Web Tools <link
+        linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION_ENTITY_DATA_MAINT">Entity Data
+        Maintenance</link> to manage Benefit Type Id. The entity name is
+        BenefitType.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Add button: Click to add a benefit.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the benefit. The benefit is
+          deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Click to save changes in the list above.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditPayrollPreferences">
+      <title>Payroll Preferences</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentPayrollPreferences.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employments &gt; In the Search Results Click Edit &gt; Payroll
+      Preferences</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Add a payroll preference</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update a payroll preference</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete a payroll preference</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>At this time the Payroll Preferences are not integrated with the
+        OFBiz Accounting application.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Payroll Preference SequenceId - This is an identifier to
+          distinguish between different preference for the same employee.<note>
+              <para>This value is required during data entry but is over
+              written with an OFBiz generated sequential number.</para>
+            </note></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Deduction Type Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Payment Method Type - Offers options for how the employee
+          would like to be paid.</para>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>HR App demo data contains many payments types that may not
+            be appropriate for paying an employee. Who wants to be paid by
+            Gift Card? Use Web Tools <link
+            linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION_ENTITY_DATA_MAINT">Entity Data
+            Maintenance</link> to manage Payment Type. The entity name is
+            PaymentMethodType.</para>
+          </note>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Period Type Id - Identifies the frequency of payment.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The date when this preference ends.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Percentage - The percentage of total pay to be paid using
+          payment preference.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Flat Amount - A flat amount of pay to be paid using payment
+          preference.<note>
+              <para>Percentage and Flat Amount are exclusive. Use one or the
+              other.</para>
+            </note></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Routing Number - A Bank Routing Number for use in electronic
+          payments.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Account Number - A Bank account number for use in electronic
+          payments.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Bank Name - The Bank name for use in electronic
+          payments.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to add a benefit. - Requires Employee
+          Role permission.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the benefit. The benefit is
+          deleted and can not be restored. Requires HR Delete or HR Admin
+          permission.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Click to save changes in the list above.
+          Requires HR Delete or HR Admin permission.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_ListPayHistories">
+      <title>Pay Histories</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentPayHistories.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employments &gt; In the Search Results Click Edit &gt; Pay
+      Histories</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Sets the Salary Step, Pay
+      Grade and Amount for a pay period. This form sets properties for using
+      the Pay Grade method for setting employee pay as described in <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionTypeRates">Position Types and
+      Rates</link>.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>At this time the Payroll Preferences are not integrated with the
+        OFBiz Accounting application and the screenlet is not in operation.
+        There should be one pay history for each employment. Currently that
+        pay history is not being displayed.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The start date of the employment.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The end date of the pay history</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Salary Step Sequence Id - Enter to use Pay Grades. This is the
+          Step Sequence Id for a Pay Grade which indicates the Rate
+          Amount.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Pay Grad Id - Enter use to Pay Grades. The Pay Grade Id
+          determines the Salary Step Sequence Id used.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Period Type - The time period over which payment is
+          made.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the Pay History. The Pay
+          History is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to save changes to a leave record.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditUnemploymentClaims">
+      <title>Unemployment Claims</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentcreateUnemploymentClaim.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employments &gt; In the Search Results Click Edit &gt; Employment
+      Claims</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Track unemployment claims
+      for an employment.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Unemployment Claim Id - Unique Id for claim. May be user
+          entered of system generated.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Unemployment Claim Date</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - User defined description of the claim.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status ID - One of Active/Open, Inactive/Closed or Planned
+          For<note>
+              <para>Use Web Tools <link
+              linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION_ENTITY_DATA_MAINT">Entity Data
+              Maintenance</link> to manage Payment Type. The entity name is
+              StatusItem with StatusTypeId set to
+              "EMPL_POSITION_STATUS".</para>
+            </note></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Unemployment Claim end date</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to create an unemployment claim.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the unemployment claim. The
+          claim is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Click to save changes in the list above.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditAgreementEmploymentAppls">
+      <title>Agreement Employment Applications</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentEditAgreementEmploymentAppls.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employments &gt; In the Search Results Click Edit &gt; Agreement
+      Employment Appl</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Creates a record
+      associating the employment to an employment agreement. An employment
+      agreements must be created in the Accounting Application before you can
+      complete this task. See <link
+      linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION_EMPL_AGREEMENTS">Employment
+      Agreements</link></para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Agreement Id - Unique identifier for the agreement. Created in
+          the Accounting Application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Agreement Item Seq Id - Sequence Id - A unique identifier for
+          an agreement item created in the Accounting Application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party Id From - Typically your Company, this is generally the
+          originating party for an employment agreement.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party Id To - The party subject to the terms of the agreement.
+          This defaults to the id of the employments party.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Role Type Id From - This defaults to 'Internal Organization',
+          the role of the party id from (Company).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Role Type Id To - This defaults to Employee, the role to the
+          Party Id To</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - This is the From Date of the Employment. This date
+          can be found in the Employments screen described above.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Agreement Date - The date when the Agreement was originated,
+          accepted, signed, or amended. This is not necessarily the From Date
+          which covers the period of performance for the Agreement.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Agreements should and usually do have an
+          expiration date, after which the Agreement is no longer in effect
+          unless extended or amended by another Agreement.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Employment button: Click to open the New Employment
+          screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to create the association between the
+          employment and an agreement.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Click to save changes in the list above.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositions">
+    <title>Employee Position</title>
+
+    <para>In OFBiz a <glossterm linkend="G_POSITION">position</glossterm> is
+    the authorization, typically from the budget of an internal organization,
+    for the Company to engage one person to do a job. OFBiz handles positions
+    in a flexible manner so you can think of a position as an authorization
+    for a full-time equivalent (FTE).</para>
+
+    <para>This means that you can fulfill a position with a person in a number
+    of different ways. You can Fill a position with one full time person,
+    change the assignment of a position from one person to another over time,
+    or split a position across more then one person at the same a time.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>As implemented a position can be fulfilled by either a person or
+      organization. For discussion here we will assume that positions are only
+      fulfilled by people. The person may or may not be an employee.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>Positions have a status. They can be one of: Planned For,
+    Active/Open, or Inactive/Closed.</para>
+
+    <para>Positions have a type, defined in Global HR Settings, which
+    describes the job and it's pay rates. Some examples types could be
+    secretary, production worker, sales manager, executive vice president or
+    OFBiz programmer. If more then one person is needed for a type of job then
+    a position must be created for each required person i.e. If 10 secretaries
+    are authorized for the Human Resource department then 10 positions are
+    created with type secretary.</para>
+
+    <para>Positions have a reporting structure. Positions report to other
+    positions and not the people who hold the position. You can identify the
+    position a position reports to and/or the positions(s) a position
+    manages.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para>In the HR App it is possible to create circular reporting
+      structures where a Position the reporting to and managed by positions
+      are the same. It is the users responsibility to exercise common sense
+      when creating the reporting structure.</para>
+    </warning>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Position Features</emphasis><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create Positions</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Fulfill Positions</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Assign Position Responsibilities</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create a Reporting Structure</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Administer Position Types, Responsibilities and Rates</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Position Search</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/PositionSearch.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employee Position</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Use the position search
+      screen to create a position, search for an existing position and view a
+      list of positions. Use Search Options to refine the search. Selecting a
+      position from the list opens positions Summary screen and provides
+      access the supporting screens Employee Position, Fulfillments,
+      Responsibilities and Reporting Structure.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Empl Position Id - Unique Id for the position. Limits Search
+          Results to id's position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status ID - One of Active/Open, Inactive/Closed or Planned
+          For</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party If - The party id of the <glossterm
+          linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION">internal organization</glossterm>
+          authorized to fill the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Budget Id - Identifies the budget authorizing the
+          position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Budget Item Seq Id - Identifies the item within the budget
+          authorizing the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Empl Position Type Id - The name of the position type.
+          Position types are defined in Global HR Settings <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositionTypes">Position Types</link>
+          .</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Estimated From Date - The date the position is expected to be
+          filled.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Estimated Thru Date - The date on which the positions budget
+          authorization is expected to end.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Salary Flag - Y if this is a salaried position else N.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Exempt Flag - Y if this position exempt from a requirement
+          else N</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Fulltime Flag - Y if this is a fulltime position else N</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Temporary Flag - Y if this is a temporary position else
+          N</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Actual From Date - The date the position is filled.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Actual Thru Date - The date the position is no longer
+          authorized.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Employee Position button: Click to open the screen to
+          create a new Employee Position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list of employee positions. Displays
+          a list of positions in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Position Id text link: Click to open position Summary
+          screen. Summary is the first menu item in a menu list of supporting
+          screens Employee Position, Fulfillments, Responsibilities and
+          Reporting Structure.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION"><glossterm
+          linkend="G_PARTY">Party Id</glossterm> button: Click to open the
+          Profile of the internal organization authorized to fill the
+          position.</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <sect2 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmplPosition">
+        <title>New Employee Position</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmployeePositionEdit.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>:</para>
+
+        <para>Human Resources &gt; Employee Position &gt; Click New Employee
+        Position</para>
+
+        <para>Human Resources &gt; Employee Position &gt; In Search Results
+        Click EmployeePosition Id column</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>This screen is used to
+        create or edit and update an employee position. In the Main Search
+        Screen it is opened in create mode by clicking the New Employee
+        Position button or update mode by clicking the EmployeePosition Id
+        column in Search Results.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Employee Position Id - Unique Id for the position. May be
+            user entered or if empty the system will generate sequence
+            number.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Status ID - One of Active/Open, Inactive/Closed or Planned
+            For.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><glossterm linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION"><glossterm
+            linkend="G_PARTY">Party Id</glossterm> - The party id of the
+            internal organization authorized to fill the
+            position.</glossterm></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Budget Id - A user entered identifier for the budget
+            authorizing the position.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Budget Item Seq Id - A user entered identifier for the
+            budget item authorizing the position.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Empl Position Type Id - Select a name for the position type.
+            Position types are defined in Global HR Settings <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositionTypes">Position Types</link>
+            .</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Estimated From Date - Enter date the position is expected to
+            be filled.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Estimated Thru Date - Enter date on which the positions
+            budget authorization is expected to end.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Salary Flag - Enter Y if this is a salaried position else
+            N.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Exempt Flag - Enter Y if this position exempt from a
+            requirement else N</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fulltime Flag - Enter Y if this is a fulltime position else
+            N</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Temporary Flag - Enter Y if this is a temporary position
+            else N</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Actual From Date - Enter the date the position is
+            filled.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Actual Thru Date - Enter the date the position is no longer
+            authorized.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions </emphasis>Create button: Click to
+        create the position.</para>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EmplPositionView">
+      <title>Position Summary</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentEmplPositionView.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employee Position &gt; In Search Results Click text in column Employee
+      Position Id</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>The Summary screen has a
+      collection of screenlets with information on the different aspects of a
+      position.</para>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Employee Position Information</title>
+
+        <para>Position information list all of the fields the HR App records
+        for a position. These fields can be edited by clicking on the EMPLOYEE
+        POSITION menu item that follows SUMMARY.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Position Id - Unique Id for the position.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Status ID - One of Active/Open, Inactive/Closed or Planned
+            For.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><glossterm linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION"><glossterm
+            linkend="G_PARTY">Party Id</glossterm> - The party id of the
+            internal organization authorized to fill the
+            position.</glossterm></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Budget Id - A user entered identifier for the budget
+            authorizing the position.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Budget Item Seq Id - A user entered identifier for the
+            budget item authorizing the position.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Empl Position Type Id - Name for the position type. Position
+            types are defined in Global HR Settings <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositionTypes">Position Types</link>
+            .</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Estimated From Date - Date the position is expected to be
+            filled.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Estimated Thru Date - Date on which the positions budget
+            authorization is expected to end.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Salary Flag - Y if this is a salaried position else
+            N.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Exempt Flag - Y if this position exempt from a requirement
+            else N</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Fulltime Flag - Y if this is a fulltime position else
+            N</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Temporary Flag - Y if this is a temporary position else
+            N</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Actual From Date - Date the position is filled.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Actual Thru Date - Date the position is no longer
+            authorized.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Party Id text link: Click to open the Profile of the
+            internal organization authorized to fill the position</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Empl Position Type Id text link: Click to open Global HR
+            Settings <link linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositionTypes">Position
+            Types</link> for position type.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Fulfillments</title>
+
+        <para>A fulfillment is the assignment of people to the position. You
+        can create update and delete fulfillments. See: <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionFulfillments">Fulfillments.</link></para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis><itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para><glossterm linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION"><glossterm
+              linkend="G_PARTY">Party Id</glossterm> </glossterm>- The party
+              id of the <glossterm linkend="G_PERSON">person</glossterm>
+              fulfilling the position.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>From Date - The date the fulfillment starts.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Thru Date - The date the fulfillment ends.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Comments - User entered comment on the fulfillment.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist></para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Responsibilities</title>
+
+        <para>The RESPONSIBILITIES screen lets you assign responsibilities to
+        a position. See: <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionResponsibilities">Responsibilities.</link></para>
+
+        <para>The administrator can add and remove responsibilities shown in
+        the Responsibility Type Id drop-down list in <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartySkills">Global HR Settings</link>.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Responsibility Type Id - Unique Id for the
+            responsibility.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>From Date - The date the responsibility starts for the
+            position.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Thru Date - The date the responsibility ends for the
+            position</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Comments - User entered comment about the
+            responsibility</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Reporting Structure:ReportsTo</title>
+
+        <para>The Reports To screenlet list the position(s) that this position
+        reports to. See: <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionReportingStructs">Reporting
+        Structure.</link></para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Empl Position Id Reporting To - The unique identifier of the
+            position this position reports to.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>From Date - The date the report to starts for the
+            position.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Thru Date - The date the report to ends for the
+            position</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Comments - User entered comment about the report to.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Primary Flag - Identifies the primary report to when there
+            is more then one report to. Y indicates primary, all other reports
+            to should be no.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Reporting Structure:ReportedTo</title>
+
+        <para>The Reports To screenlet list the position that the selected
+        position reports to. See: <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionResponsibilities">Reporting
+        Structure.</link></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Empl Position Id Managed By - The unique identifier of the
+            position reporting to this position.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>From Date - The date the reporting to starts for the
+            position.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Thru Date - The date the reporting to ends for the
+            position</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Comments - User entered comment about the reporting
+            to.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Primary Flag - Identifies this as the primary reporting to
+            when the position also reports to other positions. Y indicates
+            primary.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Employee Position</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/PositionEdit.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employee Position &gt; In Search Results Click text in column Employee
+      Position Id &gt; Click Employee Position menu item.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Update positions.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Position Id - Unique Id for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status ID - One of Active/Open, Inactive/Closed or Planned
+          For.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION"><glossterm
+          linkend="G_PARTY">Party Id</glossterm> - The party id of the
+          internal organization authorized to fill the
+          position.</glossterm></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Budget Id - A user entered identifier for the budget
+          authorizing the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Budget Item Seq Id - A user entered identifier for the budget
+          item authorizing the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Empl Position Type Id - Name for the position type. Position
+          types are defined in Global HR Settings <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositionTypes">Position Types</link>
+          .</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Estimated From Date - Date the position is expected to be
+          filled.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Estimated Thru Date - Date on which the positions budget
+          authorization is expected to end.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Salary Flag - Y if this is a salaried position else N.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Exempt Flag - Y if this position exempt from a requirement
+          else N</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Fulltime Flag - Y if this is a fulltime position else N</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Temporary Flag - Y if this is a temporary position else
+          N</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Actual From Date - Date the position is filled.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Actual Thru Date - Date the position is no longer
+          authorized.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action - </emphasis>Update button: Click to
+      save changes to a position record.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionFulfillments">
+      <title>Fulfillments</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/PositionFulfillments.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employee Position &gt; In Search Results Click text in column Employee
+      Position Id &gt; Click Fulfillments menu item</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Add, update and delete a
+      <glossterm linkend="G_FULFILLMENT">fulfillment.</glossterm></para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_INTERNAL_ORGANIZATION"><glossterm
+          linkend="G_PARTY">Party Id</glossterm> </glossterm>- Enter the party
+          id of the <glossterm linkend="G_PERSON">person</glossterm>
+          fulfilling the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - Enter the date the fulfillment starts.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Enter the date the fulfillment ends.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Comments - Enter a comment on the fulfillment.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Add button: Click to add a fulfillment.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party Id column button: Click to open the profile of the
+          person filling the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update column button: Click to save changes to the
+          fulfillment</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the fulfillment. The item is
+          deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionResponsibilities">
+      <title>Responsibilities</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/PositionResponsibilities.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employee Position &gt; In Search Results Click text in column Employee
+      Position Id &gt; Click Responsibilities menu item</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Add, update and delete a
+      <glossterm linkend="G_RESPONSIBILITY">responsibility</glossterm></para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Responsibility Type Id - One of the available responsibility
+          types as, defined in <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditResponsibilityTypes">Global Settings
+          Responsibility Types</link> , describing the duties required of the
+          position</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The date the when the position became responsible
+          for this type</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The date the when the position was no longer
+          responsible for this type</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Comments - User defined comment</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Add button: Click to add a responsibility.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to save changes to the
+          responsibility.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the responsibility. The
+          responsibility is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionReportingStructs">
+      <title>Reporting Structure</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/PositionReportingStruct.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Add, update and delete a
+      Reports To / Reported To reporting structure.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Empl Position Id Reporting To - Enter the unique identifier of
+          the position this position reports to.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Empl Position Id Managed By - Enter the unique identifier of
+          the position reporting to this position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The date the reporting to starts for the
+          position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The date the reporting to ends for the
+          position</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Comments - User entered comment about the reporting to.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Primary Flag - Identifies this as the primary reporting to
+          when the position also reports to other positions. Y indicates
+          primary.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Add button: Click to add a Reports / Reported To
+          structure.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to save changes to the structure.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the structure. The structure is
+          deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Performance Review</title>
+
+    <para>Performance Review allows employees to post reviews that can be used
+    by management in evaluating the performance of individual employee. Each
+    review has a list of items that can be rated and commented on. The
+    employee's position is also captured with the review which allows the
+    creation of reports that look at ratings for a review item by
+    position.</para>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindPerfReviews">
+      <title>Search Performance Review</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/PerformanceReviewSearch.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Performance Review</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis>: Use the Performance Review
+      screen to create a review, search for an existing review and view a list
+      of reviews. Use Search Options to refine the search. Selecting a review
+      from the list opens the Edit Performance Review screenlet.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Reviewed - Name of the employee being
+          reviewed.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Review Id - An automatically created unique identifier for the
+          review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reviewer - The name of the employee performing the review.
+          Employees may review themselves in a self-assessment review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Payment Id - A review may be associated with a payment when
+          the payment is relevant to the review. When you use the Lookup
+          Payment screen you can filter the payment types that apply to
+          employee compensation e.g. Commission Payment, Paycheck or
+          Payroll.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Position Id - The position held by the Employee Reviewed is
+          stored with the review. When entering this item make sure to enter
+          the correct position for the employee. This will help in evaluating
+          reviews grouped by position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The start of the period under review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The end of the period under review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Comments - A user defined description for the review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Perfreview button: Click to open the New Performance
+          Review screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list reviews. Displays a list of
+          reviews in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Reviewed column text: Click to open the employee's
+          profile screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Review Id column text: Click to open Edit Performance Review
+          screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reviewer column text: Click to open reviewers profile
+          screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>New Performance Review</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/PerformanceReviewEditPerfReviewItems.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Performance Review &gt; Click New Perfreview</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage:</emphasis> Create a new performance
+      review.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Reviewed - Enter a Name of the employee being
+          reviewed.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reviewer - Enter the name of the employee performing the
+          review. Employees may review themselves in a self-assessment
+          review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Payment Id - A review may be associated with a payment when
+          the payment is relevant to the review. When you use the Lookup
+          Payment screen you can filter the payment types that apply to
+          employee compensation e.g. Commission Payment, Paycheck or
+          Payroll.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Position Id - The position held by the Employee Reviewed is
+          stored with the review. When entering this item make sure to enter
+          the correct position for the employee. This will help in evaluating
+          reviews grouped by position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - Enter the start of the period under review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Enter the end of the period under review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Comments - Enter a user defined description for the
+          review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis> Create button: Click to
+      create the a review.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditPerfReviews">
+      <title>Edit Performance Review</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/PerformanceReviewEdit.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs:</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Human Resources &gt; Performance Review &gt; Click New
+          Perfreview</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Human Resources &gt; Performance Review &gt; In Search Results
+          Click text in Review Id column</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage:</emphasis> Usage - This screen is
+      used to create or edit and update an performance review. In the Main
+      Search Screen it is opened in create mode by clicking the New Perfreview
+      button or update mode by clicking the Perf Review Id column in Search
+      Results.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Reviewed - Name of the employee being
+          reviewed.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reviewer - Name of the employee performing the review.
+          Employees may review themselves in a self-assessment review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Payment Id - A review may be associated with a payment when
+          the payment is relevant to the review. When you use the Lookup
+          Payment screen you can filter the payment types that apply to
+          employee compensation e.g. Commission Payment, Paycheck or
+          Payroll.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Position Id - The position held by the Employee Reviewed is
+          stored with the review. When entering this item make sure to enter
+          the correct position for the employee. This will help in evaluating
+          reviews grouped by position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The start of the period under review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The end of the period under review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Comments - A user defined description for the review.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis> Update button: Click to
+      save changes.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Perfreview Items</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/PerformanceReviewItem.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Performance Review &gt; In Search Results Click text in Review Id column
+      &gt; Click Perfreview Items</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage:</emphasis> Add or delete a
+      performance review item. <note>
+          <para>Review items can not be changed.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Review Item drop-down list: Select an item from the list. The
+          items describe a review category.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Rating drop-down list: Select a rating for the review
+          item.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Comments text: User defined comment on the review item.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Item List Delete button: Click to delete the review item type.
+          The review item is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click create to save the review item.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Skills</title>
+
+    <para>The Skills feature serves two important functions. In Skills you
+    can:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Find employees or organizations that have the required skills
+        for a job.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Assign skills to an employees and organizations</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>Skills are organized into skill groups. Skills and skill groups are
+    managed in <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditSkillType">Global Settings
+    Skills</link> where they can be created updated and deleted.</para>
+
+    <para>Skills are characterized by the fields Years Experience, R2ating and
+    Sill Level, which are all numeric values. You can apply any meaning that
+    suites your business needs to these values.</para>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindPartySkills">
+      <title>Search Skills</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/SkillsFindEmployeeSkills.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Skills</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Launch a screen to assign a skills to an employee or
+          organization.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Look for skills using a variety of criteria. You can search
+          for both people and organizations using the Type drop-down-list,
+          find skills by geography using the Country / State drop-down-list,
+          look by skill or skill group, and your search by experience rating
+          and skill level. Using all of these criteria you an answer a
+          questions like "What companies in CA with over $1,000,000 in revenue
+          have more them 5 years experience in OFBiz Installation".</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From the Search Results screenlet you can navigate to the
+          profile of people and organizations that meet your criteria,
+          navigate to an update screen or delete a skill.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>The Search Results will have one row for each skill assigned to
+        a person or group. Some columns in the results only apply to people
+        while others only belong to groups. The list is ordered by the persons
+        last name and then the group name.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party Id</glossterm> - Use the
+          Party Id to narrow your search to a single person or
+          organization.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Type - Use Type to filter Search Results to only people or
+          organizations.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>City - Limits the results to one city.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>State - Limits the results to a single state or providence.
+          The list of states is dependent on the selection in Country.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Country - Limits the results to a single country. Changing the
+          country will update the list of states.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_SKILL_GROUP">Skill Group</glossterm> -
+          Limits results to member of the group.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_SKILL">Skill</glossterm> - Limits
+          results to a single skill.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_ANNUAL_REVENUE">Annual
+          Revenue</glossterm> - Limits results to a range of annual
+          revenue.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_NUMBER_OF_EMPLOYEES">Number of
+          Employees</glossterm> - Limits results to an range of the employee
+          count.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_YEARS_EXPERIENCE">Years
+          Experience</glossterm> - Limits results to the range or the years of
+          experience.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_RATING">Rating</glossterm> - Limits
+          results to a range or the ratings.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_SKILL_LEVEL">Skill Level</glossterm> -
+          Limits results to a range or the skill levels.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields Search Results</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Group Name - Name of a group applies only if the skill belongs
+          to a group</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Annual Revenue - Only reported for a group.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Number of employees - Only reported for a group.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Last Name - Only reported for a person.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>First Name - Only reported for a person.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Party Skill button: Click to open the screen to create a
+          new skill.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party column button: Click to open the parties profile.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update column button: Click to update the parties skill
+          list.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete column button: Click to delete the item. The item is
+          deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_NewPartySkill">
+      <title>New Skill</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/SkillsNewPartySkill.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Skills &gt; Click button New Party Skill</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Create a new skill.
+      Skills are assigned to a party so a person or organization can have a
+      skill. You can continue to create skills without leaving the screenlet.
+      When finished click return to go back to the main screen.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party Id</glossterm> - Unique
+          identifier of the Person or Organization with the skill.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_SKILL">Skill</glossterm> - Skill
+          name</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_YEARS_EXPERIENCE">Years
+          Experience</glossterm> - The years of experience.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_RATING">Rating</glossterm> - A user
+          defined numeric skill rating.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_SKILL_LEVEL">Skill Level</glossterm> - A
+          user defined numeric skill level.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to create the party skill.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Return button: Click to return the main Skills screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Update Skills</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/SkillsEditEmployeeSkills.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Skills &gt; In Search Results Click Update button</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>From this screen you can
+      create, update or delete a party skill.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_SKILL">Skill</glossterm> - Skill
+          name</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_YEARS_EXPERIENCE">Years
+          Experience</glossterm> - The years of experience.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_RATING">Rating</glossterm> - A user
+          defined numeric skill rating.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><glossterm linkend="G_SKILL_LEVEL">Skill Level</glossterm> - A
+          user defined numeric skill level.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Party Skill button: Click to open the screen to create a
+          new skill.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Click to save changes in the row.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the rows skill. The skill is
+          deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Return button: Click to return the main Skills screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Qualifications</title>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindPartyQuals">
+      <title>Search Qualifications</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/QualificationsFindPartyQuals.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Qualifications</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> Use the Qualifications
+      screen to create or update a <link
+      linkend="G_PARTY_QUALIIFICATION_TYPE">qualification</link>. When the
+      qualification opens the first 20 qualifications are displayed in the
+      Search Results. Use Search Options to refine the search.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party Id</link> - Limits the list
+          to a single person or organization.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link
+          linkend="G_PARTY_QUALIIFICATION_TYPE">Qualification</link> - The
+          Qualification name.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The start date of the qualification.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Qualification Desc - A user defined description of the
+          qualification.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Title - A user defined title for the qualification</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status - One of completed, deferred or incomplete may be used
+          to indicate if state of the qualification for the party.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Verify Status - Indicates if the validity of the qualification
+          has be checked or not.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The end date of the qualification i.e. The
+          expiration date of a drivers license</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Party Qualification button: Click open the screen to
+          create a new qualification for a person or organization.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list of qualifications. Displays a
+          list of qualifications in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party Id column button: Click to open the person or
+          organizations profile screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the qualification. The
+          qualification is deleted and can not be restored.<note>
+              <para>Instead of deleting a qualification it is better to set
+              the thru date.</para>
+            </note></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Click to save changes in the list above the
+          button.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_NewPartyQual">
+      <title>New Party Qualification</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/QualificationsNewPartyQual.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Qualifications &gt; Click New Party Qualification</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Use this screen to add a
+      <link linkend="G_PARTY_QUALIIFICATION_TYPE">qualification</link> to a
+      person or organization.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party Id</link> - Limits the list
+          to a single person or organization.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link
+          linkend="G_PARTY_QUALIIFICATION_TYPE">Qualification</link> - The
+          Qualification name.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The start date of the qualification.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Qualification Desc - A user defined description of the
+          qualification.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Title - A user defined title of the qualification</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status - One of completed, deferred or incomplete may be used
+          to indicate if state of the qualification for the party.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Verify Status - Indicates if the validity of the qualification
+          has be checked.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The end date of the qualification i.e. The
+          expiration date of a drivers license</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis> Click Create to add a
+      qualification to a person or organization. The qualification will appear
+      in the party <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeQuals">Qualities</link>
+      screen and <link linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartyQuals">Qualities</link>
+      Search Results list.</para>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Recruitment</title>
+
+    <para>In the OFBiz Recruitment feature you can create job requisitions
+    when you are looking for candidates to fill a position. The requisition
+    identifies the skills, qualifications, experience and number of resources
+    needed for a position. You can track job interviews of different types and
+    align them to the requisition. You can post requisitions internally to
+    track the status of applicants for a position.</para>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindJobRequisitions">
+      <title>Search Job Requisition</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentJobRequisitionSearch.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Recruitment</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis>: Use the Job Requisition
+      screen to create a requisitions, search for an existing requisitions and
+      view a list of requisitions. Selecting an requisition from the list
+      opens the Edit Job Requisition screen.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields Search Options</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Requisition Id - Unique identifier, generated
+          automatically by the system, when the requisition is created.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Experience in months - A number (not text) for number of
+          months experience desired for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Experience in years - A number (not text) for number of years
+          experience desired for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Location - User defined text describing the location of
+          the job.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Skill Type Id - Select one of the Skill Types from the Drop
+          Down list.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Posting Type - Select one of the Job Types from the Drop
+          Down list</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Exam Type Enum Id - Select one of the Exam Types from the Drop
+          Down list</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Job Requisition button: Click to open the screen to create
+          a new Job Requisition.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list of requisitions. Displays a list
+          of requisitions in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>New Job Requisition</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentJobRequisitionNew.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Recruitment &gt; Click the New Job Requisition Button</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Create a New Job
+      Requisition</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Location - Enter text describing the location of the
+          job.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Age - Enter desired age of applicant.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>No Of Resources - Number of people required for this position.
+          You can create an internal job posting for each required resource to
+          an instance of the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Gender - Enter desired gender of applicant.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Duration Months</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Qualification</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Exam Type Enum Id - Select one of the Exam Types from the Drop
+          Down list</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Skill Type Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Experience in months - Enter a number (not text) for number of
+          months experience desired for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Experience in years - Enter a number (not text) for number of
+          years experience desired for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Skill Type Id - Select one of the Skill Types from the Drop
+          Down list.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Posting Type - Select one of the Job Types from the Drop
+          Down list</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to create a requisition.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Job Requisition</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentJobRequisitionEdit.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Recruitment &gt; Click the button In Search Results column Job
+      Requisition Id</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Update a
+      requisition</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Location - Enter text describing the location of the
+          job.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Age -</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>No Of Resources - Number of people required for this position.
+          You can create an internal job posting for each required resource to
+          an instance of the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Gender</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Duration Months</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Qualification</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Exam Type Enum Id - Select one of the Exam Types from the Drop
+          Down list</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Skill Type Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Experience in months - Enter a number (not text) for number of
+          months experience desired for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Experience in years - Enter a number (not text) for number of
+          years experience desired for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Skill Type Id - Select one of the Skill Types from the Drop
+          Down list.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Posting Type - Select one of the Job Types from the Drop
+          Down list</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to save changes to the
+          requisition.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindInternalJobPosting">
+      <title>Internal Job Posting</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentFindJobInterview.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Recruitment &gt; Click the button In Search Results column Apply</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Create a Job Posting. A
+      posting links a requisition to a position.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Application Date - Date application was submitted.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - Party Id of application approver.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Requisition Id - The target requisition or the
+          application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action </emphasis>Create button: Click to
+      create the application.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Search Internal Job Posting</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentInternalJobPostingSearch.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Recruitment &gt; Click Internal Job Posting menu item</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Use the Internal Job
+      Applications screen to create a job posting, search for an existing
+      posting and view a list of postings. Use Search Options to refine the
+      search. Clicking the button in the Application Id column of the Search
+      Results opens the Internal Job Posting screenlet for updating.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Application Id - System generated unique identifier for the
+          application. May not be changed.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Application Date - Date the application was submitted.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - Party Id of person approving the
+          application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Requisition Id - The target requisition or the
+          application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis> Update button: Click to
+      save changes to a leave record.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Search for Job Interview</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentFindJobInterview.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Recruitment &gt; Click Internal Job Posting menu item &gt; Click Job
+      Interview menu item</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Use the Job Review screen
+      to create an interview, search for an existing interview and view a list
+      of interviews. Use Search Options to refine the search. Click the button
+      in the Job Interview Id column of the Search Results screenlet to open
+      the Edit Job Interview screenlet.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interviewee Party Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Requisition Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interviewer Party Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Type Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Grade Secured Enum Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Result</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Date</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Job Interview</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindJobInterview">
+      <title>New Job Interview</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentJobInterviewNew.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Recruitment &gt; Click Internal Job Posting menu item &gt; Click Job
+      Interview menu item &gt; Click button New Job Interview</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Create a new job
+      interview.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interviewee Party Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Requisition Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interviewer Party Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Type Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Grade Secured Enum Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Result</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Date</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis> Create button: Click to
+      create the an interview.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Update a Job Interview</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentJobInterviewEdit.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Recruitment &gt; Click Internal Job Posting menu item &gt; Click Find
+      &gt; Click the text In Search Results column Job Interview Id</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Update a job
+      interview.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interviewee Party Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Requisition Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interviewer Party Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Type Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Grade Secured Enum Id</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Result</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Job Interview Date</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis> Update button:: Click to
+      save changes to a Job Interview</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindApprovals">
+      <title>Approval</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentFindApprovals.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para>Defects prevent a description of the feature at this time.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindRelocation">
+      <title>Relocation</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/RecuritmentFindRelocation.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para>Defects prevent a description of the feature at this time.</para>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Training</title>
+
+    <para>Users with Work Effort User permission and HR Administrator
+    permission can create, assign and approve training classes in the Training
+    feature. Other users can view available classes, their training status and
+    request enrollment to a class. A persons training history is visible in
+    the Employees feature <link
+    linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeTrainings">Training</link> screenlet.
+    Training classes are named and managed in Global HR Settings <link
+    linkend="HUMANRES_EditTrainingTypes">Training Class Type</link>
+    screen.</para>
+
+    <para>The main screen in the Training feature is the Training Calendar.
+    This is where you add classes and class participants. You can navigate the
+    calendar by clicking the navigation text for day, week and month views
+    located in the calendar title bar.</para>
+
+    <para>Training classes are created in the Training Calendar by clicking
+    the Add New text command located in each calendar day cell. This action
+    opens a screenlet above the calendar for entering information about the
+    training class. If you try to create a class and do not have Work Effort
+    User permission, as mentioned above, you will get an error. After a class
+    is created a numeric class identifier and text identifier description
+    appear in the calendar for the day of the class.</para>
+
+    <para>You add participants to a class by clicking on the class identifier.
+    If you are the creator of the class the Participants screenlet above and
+    to the right of the calendar opens. Here you Add participants by entering
+    their party id and clicking the Add button. A list of participants appears
+    in Add screenlet.</para>
+
+    <para>After a participant is added the Training Approvals search screen
+    opens showing the status as Assigned. To add another participant return to
+    the calendar and select the class again then repeat the process of
+    entering the party id.</para>
+
+    <para>If you are not the creator of the class and the administrator did
+    not add you to the class you can request participation in the class. Click
+    on the class identifier and the training request screenlet opens above the
+    calendar on the left of the screen. When a user request a class they enter
+    the Party Id of the person who can authorize the class. The initial status
+    of the request is "Applied ".</para>
+
+    <para>To approve the request the training administrator opens the Training
+    Approvals screen and finds all request with a status of "Applied". They
+    look up the person listed as the approver party. After checking with the
+    approver they click update button to open the approval screen. In the
+    approval screen the administrator sets the Approver Status and adds a
+    reason for the decision. The user can see the status of their training
+    schedule by clicking on the Training Status menu.</para>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_TrainingCalendar">
+      <title>Training Calendar</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/TrainingCalendar.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Training</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Add New classes</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Add participants to a class</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Request to participate in a class</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Field - </emphasis>Each cell in the calendar
+      displays a numeric and text identifier for each class created for the
+      day.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Add New text link: Click to open the Add Training
+          screenlet</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Class Id numeric text link: Click to Add Participants
+          to a class (class creator) or Request a class (not the class
+          creator)</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Add Training Event</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/TrainingCalendarAdd.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Training &gt; Next to the Date / Time Click Add New</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Add a new training class
+      for a date and time.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Name - The name of a training class as defined in
+          Global HR Settings <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditTrainingTypes">Training Class
+          Type.</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - User entered description of the class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - Starting date time for the class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Ending date time for the class.<note>
+              <para>Classes spanning more then one day will only appear in the
+              calendar on the day in which the class was started.</para>
+            </note></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to create the training class. The new
+          entry will appear as a calendar entry in the day with the from and
+          thru time, a numeric identifier for the created class and text
+          identifier for the class type i.e. 12:00 AM-11:59 PM 10010
+          ADVAN_TRAINING</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_AssignTraining">
+      <title>Add Training Event Participant</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/TrainingCalendarAddParticipant.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Training &gt; In a Calendar Entry click on the numeric Class identifier
+      (opens screenlet right side of screen above the calendar)</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Used by the Administrator
+      who created the class to add participants to the class.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Field </emphasis><glossterm
+      linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party Id</glossterm> - The Party Id of a <glossterm
+      linkend="G_PERSON">person</glossterm> who will participate in the
+      class</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action - </emphasis>Add button: Click to add
+      the person to the class participant list.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Request Training</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/TrainingCalendarTrainingCalendar.jpg"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Training &gt; Click on the numeric Class identifier (opens screenlet
+      left side of screen above the calendar)</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Enables HR App users to
+      request participation in a training class.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Field </emphasis> Approver Party - The Party
+      Id of a <glossterm linkend="G_PERSON">person</glossterm> who will
+      approver the users participation in a class</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action - </emphasis>Apply button: Click to
+      add a request for participation in a class.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindTrainingApprovals">
+      <title>Approve Training Participant</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/TrainingCalendarApprovals.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Training &gt; Click Training Approvals menu item (visible only to the
+      administrator)</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Find training
+      participation records and update approver status.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party Id - The <glossterm linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+          id</glossterm> of the person assigned to a class. Use to find all
+          classes for a person.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Request Id - A unique identifier of the request for a
+          person.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Class Type - The type of class as defined in Global
+          Settings <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditTrainingTypes">Training Class
+          Type.</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Work Effort Id - Another description used internally. Same as
+          the numeric identifier shown in the calendar entry.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - Starting date time for the class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Ending date time for the class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - The party id of the person with authority to
+          approve training for a participant applying for training.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Status - The status of the request for participation.
+          If request entered by the administrator the default value is
+          Assigned. If the request is from a user then the default value is
+          Applied. If the value is Applied then the Update button will appear
+          in the Update field of the Search Results if not then the text
+          "Update" appears and no further action can be taken.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reason - A user entered reason for a change in Approver
+          Status.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list of training class request.
+          Displays a list of request in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party Id column button: Click to open the
+          participants profile screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party column button: Click to open the approvers
+          profile screen.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to open the Edit HumanResTrainingApproval
+          screenlet to change the status of a training request.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditTrainingApprovals">
+      <title>Training Approval</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/TrainingCalendarEditTrainingApprovals.jpg"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Training &gt; Click Training Approvals menu item (visible only to the
+      administrator) &gt; In Search Results screenlet Update column click
+      Update button</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis> Used by training
+      administrator to update the training Approval Status and Reason.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party Id - The <glossterm linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+          id</glossterm> of the person assigned to a class. Use to find all
+          classes for a person.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Class Type - The type of class as defined in Global
+          Settings <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditTrainingTypes">Training Class
+          Type.</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - Starting date time for the class</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Request Id - A unique identifier of the request for a
+          person.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Work Effort Id - Another description used internally. Same as
+          the numeric identifier shown in the calendar entry.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Ending date time for the class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - The party id of the person with authority to
+          approve training for a participant applying for training.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Status - The status of the request for participation.
+          If request entered by the administrator the default value is
+          Assigned. If the request is from a user then the default value is
+          Applied. If the value is Applied then the Update button will appear
+          in the Update field of the Search Results if not then the text
+          "Update" appears and no further action can be taken.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reason - A user entered description of the reason for a change
+          in Approver Status. e.g. Approver Status Reason Class is required
+          for all new employees.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis> Update button: Click to
+      save changes to a leave record</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindTrainingStatus">
+      <title>Training Status</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/TrainingCalendarFindTrainingStatus.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Training &gt; Click Training Status</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis> Users can view status of
+      training assignments. This information is also available to the employee
+      in the <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeTrainings">Training</link>
+      screenlet of the Employees feature.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Request Id - A unique identifier of the request for a
+          person.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Training Class Type - The type of class as defined in Global
+          Settings <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditTrainingTypes">Training Class
+          Type.</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Work Effort Id - This is a unique identifier for the training
+          class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - Starting date time for the class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - Ending date time for the class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - The party id of the person with authority to
+          approve training for a participant applying for training.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Status - The status of the request for participation.
+          If request entered by the administrator the default value is
+          Assigned.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Reason - A user entered description of the reason for a change
+          in Approver Status. e.g. Approver Status Reason Class is required
+          for all new employees.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis>a</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Search button: Click for a list of training classes with
+          Approver Status. Displays a list of classes in the Search Results
+          section.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employee Party button: Click to open the profile in the Party
+          Manager application of the person participating in the class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party button: Click to open the profile in the Party
+          Manager application of the person approving participation in the
+          class.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>The OFBiz Party Manager application is separate from the HR App.
+        To return to the HR App.</para>
+      </note>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Employment Applications</title>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindEmploymentApps">
+      <title>Search Employment Applications</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentApplicationSearch.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employment Applications</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis> Employment Applications
+      allows users to register a persons interest in applying for a position.
+      The application records the person applying for a position, the party
+      who recommended the person (this could be a person from the company or
+      an external organization like a placement service) and the person
+      responsible approving the application. It records the source of the
+      application and maintains a status.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Application Id - Unique Id for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Empl Position Id - Identifies the position (job) applied for.
+          See <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPosition">Employee
+          Position</link> for information about a position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status ID - Status of the application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employment App Source Type Id - Identifies the channel that
+          delivered the application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Applying Party Id - Party Id of the applicant.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Referred By Party Id - Party Id of the person or organization
+          referring the applicant for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Application Date - Date the application was submitted.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Employment Application button: Click to open the screen to
+          create a new employment application for a person</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list of employment applications.
+          Displays a list of employment applications in the Search Results
+          screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Click to save changes in the list above.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the employment application. The
+          employment applications is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_NewEmploymentApp">
+      <title>New Employment Application</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/EmploymentApplicationNew.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Employment Applications &gt; Click button New Employment
+      Application</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis> Create a new application
+      for a position</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Application Id - Unique Id for the position. May be user
+          entered or if empty the system will generate sequence number</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Empl Position Id - Identifies the position (job) applied for.
+          See <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPosition">Employee
+          Position</link> for information about a position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Status ID - Status of the application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Employment App Source Type Id - Identifies the channel that
+          delivered the application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Applying Party Id - Party Id of the applicant.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Referred By Party Id - Party Id of the person or organization
+          referring the applicant for the position.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Application Date - Date the application was submitted.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis> Create button: Click to
+      create an Employment Application</para>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Resumes</title>
+
+    <para>The resume feature matches people to a resume(s). Each entry has a
+    unique identifier that can be user entered or a system generated sequence
+    number. The identifier links a person to an instance of their resume. The
+    resume itself can be entered in text in the Resume Text field, identified
+    by a Content Id or both.</para>
+
+    <para>The Content Id is from the Content Manager (CM) application. CM
+    offers a richer set options for tracking resumes. CM was designed for
+    acquiring, storing and retrieving electronic data in varying formats -
+    such as text, images, MS Word, PDF or even web URL's.</para>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindPartyResumes">
+      <title>Search Resumes</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/ResumeSearch.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Resumes</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Use the Resume screen to
+      create a resume, search for an existing resume and view a list of
+      resumes. Use Search Options to refine the search. Select a resume from
+      the Search Results to update resume information.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Id - Use the Resume Id to narrow your search to a
+          single resume.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>.Party Id - Use the Party Id to narrow your search to a single
+          person.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Content Id - The content identifier for content in the Content
+          Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Date - A date can be entered to suite the business
+          needs. For example the date could be a date a resume was received or
+          the date it was entered into the system. If empty will default to
+          the current date.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Text - User entered text of the resume.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Party Resume button: Click to open the screen to create a
+          new Party Resume for a person.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list of resumes. Displays a list of
+          resumes in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Id:</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party Id button: Click to open HR App Profile of the subject
+          of the resume.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the item. The item is deleted
+          and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditPartyResume">
+      <title>New Resume</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/ResumeNew.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Resume &gt; Click button New Party Resume</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Create a New Party
+      Resume.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Id - Unique identifier that associates a party with a
+          resume.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>.Party Id - Party Id of the person who is the subject of the
+          resume.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Content Id - The content identifier for content in the Content
+          Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Date - A date can be entered to suite the business
+          needs. For example the date could be a date a resume was received or
+          the date it was entered into the system. If empty will default to
+          the current date.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Text - User entered text of the resume.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action </emphasis>Create button: Click to
+      create a Resume</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Edit Resume</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/ResumeEdit.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Resume &gt; In Search Results Click text link Resume Id</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage </emphasis>Edit and update a
+      resume.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Id - Unique identifier that associates a party with a
+          resume. Can not be changed</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Content Id - The content identifier for content in the Content
+          Manager application. See for additional information</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Date - A date can be entered to suite the business
+          needs. For example the date could be a date a resume was received or
+          the date it was entered into the system. If empty will default to
+          the current date.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Resume Text - User entered text of the resume.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis> Update button: Click to
+      save changes to a resume record.</para>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter>
+    <title>Leave</title>
+
+    <para>The HR App Leave feature is the way for your company to manage
+    employ leave in OFBiz. Employees can schedule leave for themselves by
+    using the Leave screen in the Employees feature or it can be done by an
+    administrator in as discussed in the section below.</para>
+
+    <para>Any user with Human Resource Employee permission can view and
+    request leave for themselves or any other employee. Only users with Human
+    Resource Approver or Administration permission can approve a leave
+    request. Only users with Administrator permission can update and delete a
+    leave request.</para>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindEmplLeaves">
+      <title>Search Leave</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/LeaveApprovalSearch.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Leave</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage </emphasis>Use the Leave screen to
+      request leave, search for leave request and view a list of leave
+      requests. When the screen opens the first 20 leave request are displayed
+      in the Search Results. Use Search Options to refine the search.
+      Selecting a update in the Leave request list opens the request for
+      update.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party Id</link> - The party id of
+          the employee requesting leave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Type Id - The name of a leave type. Leave types are
+          defined in <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global
+          Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Reason Type - The name of a leave type reason. Leave
+          types reasons are defined in <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The data the leave starts.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The data the leave ends.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - The <link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+          id</link> of the <link linkend="G_PERSON">person</link> with
+          authority to approve the leave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Status - A leave request may be Created, Approved, or
+          Rejected.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>New Leave button: Click open the screen to create a new leave
+          request for an employee.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list of leave request. Displays a
+          list of request in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party Id button: Click to open the employees profile in the
+          OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party button: Click to open the approvers profile in
+          the OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to save changes to a leave record.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the leave request. The request
+          item is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para>The OFBiz Party Manager application is separate from the HR App.
+        To return to the HR App Select HR from the Applications menu. You will
+        be returned to the main <link linkend="HUMANRES_main">Main</link>
+        screen.</para>
+      </warning>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeave">
+      <title>New Employee Leave</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/LeaveEmployeeNew.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Leave &gt; Click New Leave</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage -</emphasis> Create a new request for
+      leave for an employee.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis><itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party Id</link> - The party id of
+            the employee requesting leave.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave Type Id - The name of a leave type. Leave types are
+            defined in <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global
+            Settings</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>From Date - The data the leave starts.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Leave Reason Type - The name of a leave type reason. Leave
+            types reasons are defined in <link
+            linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global
+            Settings</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Thru Date - The data the leave ends.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Approver Party - The <link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+            id</link> of the <link linkend="G_PERSON">person</link> with
+            authority to approve the leave.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Description - A user entered description of the
+            leave.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist></para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action -</emphasis> Create button: Click
+      create to create a leave request. The request is in edit mode.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>To create another leave you must clear the previous leave from
+        the edit mode. To do this click the Employee Leave menu item. The the
+        Search Leave screen opens. Click the New Leave button, the Add
+        Employee Leave screenlet opens.</para>
+      </note>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Update Employee Leave</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/LeaveEmployeeEdit.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Leave &gt; In the Search Results click Update button</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage: </emphasis>You can update the
+      information in any of fields listed below in the update leave
+      screenlet.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Reason Type - The name of a leave type reason. Leave
+          types reasons are defined in <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The data the leave ends.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - The <link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+          id</link> of the <link linkend="G_PERSON">person</link> with
+          authority to approve the leave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - A user entered description of the leave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para>If you update Party Id, Leave Type Id or From Date you will get
+        an error message. The Update button will change to Create. You can
+        click create to save your changes as a new record. To update any of
+        update-able fields in the original record, return to the search screen
+        (Click the Employee Leave menu item) and click the update button for
+        the item you wish to update.</para>
+      </warning>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Action </emphasis>Update button: Click to
+      save changes to the leave request.</para>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindLeaveApprovals">
+      <title>Search Leave Approval</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/LeaveApprovalSearch.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Leave &gt; Click Leave Approval menu item</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>The Leave Approval menu item is visible only to users with
+        Administrator or Approver permission.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage </emphasis> Use the Leave Approval
+      screen to search for leave request and view a list of leave requests in
+      the same manners as in the Employee Leave screen described in the
+      previous section. Selecting a update in the Leave Approval search
+      results opens the Edit Leave Approval Status screen (where the Leave
+      Approval screen opened the update screen).</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>The Leave Approval Search Option Approver Party defaults to the
+        logon user id. This has the effect of only showing request for
+        approval that apply to the current login user. This field can be
+        manually cleared to show all leave request.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party Id</link> - The party id of
+          the employee requesting leave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Type Id - The name of a leave type. Leave types are
+          defined in <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">2Global
+          Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Reason Type - The name of a leave type reason. Leave
+          types reasons are defined in <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The data the leave starts.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The data the leave ends.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - The <link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+          id</link> of the <link linkend="G_PERSON">person</link> with
+          authority to approve the leave. Defaults to the user logon
+          id.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Status - A leave request may be Created, Approved, or
+          Rejected.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Find button: Click for a list of leave request. Displays a
+          list of leave request in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Party Id button: Click to open the employees profile in the
+          OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party button: Click to open the approvers profile in
+          the OFBiz Party Manager application.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to open the Edit Leave Approval Status
+          screenlet.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para>The OFBiz Party Manager application is separate from the HR App.
+        To return to the HR App Select HR from the Applications menu. You will
+        be returned to the main <link linkend="HUMANRES_main">Main</link>
+        screen.</para>
+      </warning>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveStatus">
+      <title>Edit Leave Approval</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/LeaveApproval.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Leave &gt; Click Leave Approval menu item &gt; Click Update</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage - </emphasis>Users with Approver or
+      Administrator may change the Leave status. The default status is
+      Created. Created status can be changed to status Approved or Rejected.
+      Approved status can be changed to Created or Rejected. Rejected status
+      can not be changed.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">Party Id</link> - The party id of
+          the employee requesting leave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Type Id - The name of a leave type. Leave types are
+          defined in <link linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global
+          Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>From Date - The data the leave starts.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Reason Type - The name of a leave type reason. Leave
+          types reasons are defined in <link
+          linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplLeaveTypes">Global Settings</link></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Thru Date - The data the leave ends.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Approver Party - The <link linkend="G_PARTY_ID">party
+          id</link> of the <link linkend="G_PERSON">person</link> with
+          authority to approve the leave. Defaults to the user logon
+          id.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Leave Status - A leave request may be Created, Approved, or
+          Rejected.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - A user entered description of the leave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Click to save changes to a leave status. The
+          new status is displayed. Click Employee Leave to return to the
+          Employee Leave screen or select another menu item as needed.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter xml:id="HUMANRES_EditSkillTypes">
+    <title>Global HR Settings</title>
+
+    <para>Global HR Settings are a collection of screens you can use to
+    customize some of the drop-down list that appear in the HR App. In
+    general, a user must have "administrator" or "create privileges" to make
+    changes to Global Settings. Data is loaded into the Global HR Settings
+    when you use the ant task load-demo or load-seed.</para>
+
+    <para>Customization of entries in drop-down list that are not supported in
+    the Global HR Settings feature can be made by an administrator using <link
+    linkend="INTRA_APPL_INTEGRATION_ENTITY_DATA_MAINT">Web Tools</link>
+    .</para>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditSkillType">
+      <title>Skill Groups</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/GlobalHRSettingsEditSkillGroups.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Global HR Settings &gt; Skill Groups</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>This screen is used to create, edit and delete the <link
+      linkend="G_SKILL_GROUP">skill groups</link> used in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartySkills">Skills</link> feature. Your company
+      employees, contract workers and partners may have hundreds of different
+      of skills. Skill groups let you organize these <link
+      linkend="G_SKILL">skills</link> so they are manageable. This is helpful
+      for reporting on your companies skill inventory or searching for
+      resources with the skills needed for a job. You can search for skills
+      and assign skills to people and organizations in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartySkills">Skills</link> feature. You can manage
+      the skills of a person or organization in their profile, see the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmployeeSkills">Employee Skills</link>
+      feature.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_SKILL_GROUP">Skill Group</link> - A name
+          describing a group of skills.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - A user defined detailed description of the skill
+          group.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to save a new skill group. The screen is
+          refreshed and the new skill group is displayed in the Skill Group
+          List.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete a skill group. The skill group
+          is deleted and can not be restored. All skills <emphasis
+          role="bold">must</emphasis> be removed from the skill group before
+          it can be deleted.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Saves any changes made to any of the
+          descriptions in the skill group list.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Skills</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="../humanres_en_images/GlobalHRSettingsEditSkills.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Global HR Settings &gt; Skill Groups Click Skills menu item.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>This screen is used to create, edit and delete <link
+      linkend="G_SKILL">skills</link> used in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindPartySkills">Skills</link> feature and <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_EditSkillTypes">Edit Employees Skills</link>
+      screenlet. Skills are associated with people and organizations. This
+      screen lets you define them so everyone in the company has the same
+      understanding of what is expected a resource that has the skill. Each
+      skill <emphasis role="bold">must</emphasis> belong to a <link
+      linkend="G_SKILL_GROUP">skill group</link>. The skill group "Other" can
+      be used if no group applies to a skill and you do not want to create a
+      new skill group.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><link linkend="G_SKILL">Skill</link> - A name describing the
+          skill.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - A user defined detailed description of the
+          skill.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to save a new skill. The screen is
+          refreshed.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete a skill. The skill is deleted
+          and can not be restored. A skill can not be deleted if it is
+          assigned to a person or organization.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Update button: Saves any changes made to any of the
+          descriptions in the skill list.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditResponsibilityTypes">
+      <title>Responsibility Types</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/GlobalHRSettingsResponsibilitylTypes.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Global HR Settings &gt; Click the Responsibility Types menu item</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>This screen is used to create, edit and delete the responsibility
+      types used to add a responsibility to a <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionResponsibilities">Position</link>.
+      Responsibility is assigned to positions so that stake holders can
+      clearly see the position's scope.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Responsibility Type Id - A required unique identifier for the
+          Responsibility Type. If one is not entered a numeric id will be
+          created.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - A user defined description of the type.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to save the Responsibility Type. The
+          screen is refreshed. If no id was entered the system generated
+          numeric id is created and displayed.<warning>
+              <para>You must clear or change the Responsibility TypeId from
+              the text box before you can create another responsibility. If
+              you do not do this you will get a duplicate id error
+              message.</para>
+            </warning></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the Responsibility Type. The
+          Responsibility Type is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Saves any changes made to any of the
+          descriptions in the list above the Submit button.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditTerminationReasons">
+      <title>Termination Reasons</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/GlobalHRSettingsTerminationReason.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Global HR Settings &gt; Click the Termination Reasons menu item</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Termination Reasons are used by employments to track terminations
+      for analysis they are used in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmployments">Employments</link> feature.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Termination Reason Id - A required unique identifier for the
+          Termination Reason. If one is not entered a numeric id will be
+          created.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - A user defined description of the type.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to save the Termination Reason. The
+          screen is refreshed. If no id was entered the system generated
+          numeric id is displayed</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the Termination Reason. The
+          Termination Reason is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Saves any changes made to any of the
+          descriptions in the list above the Submit button.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditTerminationTypes">
+      <title>Termination Types</title>
+
+      <screenshot>
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center"
+                       fileref="../humanres_en_images/GlobalHRSettingsTerminationTypes.jpg"
+                       scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </screenshot>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources &gt;
+      Global HR Settings &gt; Termination Types</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Termination Types are used by employments to track terminations
+      for analysis see usage in the <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmployments">Employments</link> feature for
+      usage.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Termination Type Id - A required unique identifier for the
+          Termination Type. If one is not entered a numeric id will be
+          created.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Description - A user defined description of the type.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Create button: Click to save the Termination Types. The screen
+          is refreshed. If no id was entered the system generated numeric id
+          is displayed</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Delete button: Click to delete the Termination Types. The
+          Termination Reason is deleted and can not be restored.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Submit button: Saves any changes made to any of the
+          descriptions in the list above the Submit button.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Position Types and Rates</title>
+
+      <para>The position type is used to categorize <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositions">Positions</link> . This is straight
+      forward and the examples Programmer, System Administrator and Business
+      Analyst form the demo data are a good demonstration of the intended
+      usage. Each position type has a schedule of rates that can be offered to
+      a applicant for a position.</para>
+
+      <para>There are two methods for defining the schedule. The first is
+      built around a rate amount. The second uses Pay Grades, which are
+      defined in the <link linkend="HUMANRES_FindPayGrades">Pay Grade</link>
+      feature.</para>
+
+      <para>The two methods are exclusive. If you use one for a position type,
+      you can not use the other.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Using the Rate Amount
+      Schedule</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Each position type may have one or more associated rate types.
+      Rate type is identified by its rate type id, a description of the rate
+      type, time period and from thru dates. Each combination of rate type and
+      time period has a rate amount.</para>
+
+      <para>Available rate types are Standard Rate, Discounted Rate, Overtime
+      Rate, Average Pay Rate, Highest Pay Rate, and Lowest Pay Rate.</para>
+
+      <para>Available time periods are Fiscal Year, Fiscal Quarter, Fiscal
+      Month, Fiscal Week, Fiscal Bi-Week, Sales Quarter, Sales Month, Rate
+      amount per Hour, Rate amount per Week, Rate amount per month, and Rate
+      amount per Quarter.</para>
+
+      <para>This sounds very complex but the example below, of a rate schedule
+      for a business analyst, should help to make it clear:</para>
+
+      <informaltable frame="box" rules="all">
+        <thead>
+          <tr align="center">
+            <th>Position Type</th>
+
+            <th>Rate Type Id</th>
+
+            <th>Period Type Id</th>
+
+            <th>Rate Amount</th>
+          </tr>
+        </thead>
+
+        <tbody>
+          <tr>
+            <td>Business Analyst</td>
+
+            <td>Standard Rate</td>
+
+            <td>Fiscal Year</td>
+
+            <td>65,000</td>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr>
+            <td/>
+
+            <td>Standard Rate</td>
+
+            <td>Rate amount per Hour</td>
+
+            <td>40.00</td>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr>
+            <td/>
+
+            <td>Discounted Rate</td>
+
+            <td>Fiscal Year</td>
+
+            <td>60,000</td>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr>
+            <td/>
+
+            <td>Discounted Rate</td>
+
+            <td>Rate amount per Hour</td>
+
+            <td>38.50</td>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr>
+            <td/>
+
+            <td>Highest Pay Rate</td>
+
+            <td>Fiscal Year</td>
+
+            <td>75,000</td>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr>
+            <td/>
+
+            <td>Highest Pay Rate</td>
+
+            <td>Rate amount per Hour</td>
+
+            <td>75.00</td>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr>
+            <td/>
+
+            <td>Lowest Pay Rate</td>
+
+            <td>Fiscal Year</td>
+
+            <td>55,000</td>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr>
+            <td/>
+
+            <td>Lowest Pay Rate</td>
+
+            <td>Rate amount per Hour</td>
+
+            <td>35.00</td>
+          </tr>
+        </tbody>
+      </informaltable>
+
+      <para>Any of the rate amounts could be offered to a person taking the
+      position of Business Analyst.</para>
+
+      <para>Only one record from the schedule is used at a time for computing
+      the employees actual pay.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Using Pay Grades</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>The pay grade method is more rigidly structured then the rate
+      amount method described above. A pay grade schedule, created in <link
+      linkend="HUMANRES_FindPayGrades">Pay Grades</link> , is used in place of
+      a schedule like the one shown above. There can be one or more pay grade
+      schedules. Each has a name and an ordered set of salary steps. Each step
+      has an amount.</para>
+
+      <para>Here is a sample pay grade schedule:</para>
+
+      <informaltable frame="box" rules="all">
+        <thead>
+          <tr align="center">
+            <th>Pay Grade Name</th>
+
+            <th>Salary Step Sequence Id</th>
+
+            <th/>
+          </tr>
+        </thead>
+
+        <tbody>
+          <tr>
+            <td>Grade 1</td>
+
+            <td>10000</td>
+
+            <td>500</td>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr>
+            <td/>
+
+            <td>10001</td>
+
+            <td>750</td>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr>
+            <th align="left"/>
+
+            <th align="left">10002</th>
+
+            <th align="left">1,000</th>
+          </tr>
+
+          <tr align="left">
+            <th/>
+
+            <th>10003</th>
+
+            <th>1,250</th>
+          </tr>
+        </tbody>
+      </informaltable>
+
+      <para>A position type is associated with a single row of the schedule
+      using the Pay Grade Name and Step Sequence Id.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage Difference Between Rate Amount
+      Schedule and Pay Grades</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>When using Rate Amount enter a value in the Rate Amount field and
+      omit values in the Pay Grade Id and Salary Step Sequence Id
+      fields.</para>
+
+      <para>When using Pay Grades enter values in Pay Grade Id and Salary Step
+      Sequence Id fields but leave the Rate Amount empty.</para>
+
+      <para>Enter values in the Rate Type Id, Period Type Id and Rate Currency
+      Uom Id for both methods.</para>
+
+      <sect2 xml:id="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositionTypes">
+        <title>Search Position Types</title>
+
+        <para>Position Types group positions for reporting.</para>
+
+        <screenshot>
+          <mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata align="center"
+                         fileref="../humanres_en_images/GlobalHRSettingsPositionTypeSearch.jpg"
+                         scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject>
+        </screenshot>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs</emphasis>: Human Resources
+        &gt; Global HR Settings &gt; Position Types</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Position types are used in the <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_FindEmplPositions">Employee Position</link> feature.
+        Use the Position Types screen to create a Position Type, search for an
+        existing Position Type and delete position types. Selecting a position
+        type from the list opens the Edit Position Type screen.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Field Search Options</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Empl Position Type Id - The drop-down list displays the
+            descriptions of the position types. The default is to select all
+            position types. If a selection is made only a single position will
+            be returned. (If two position types have the same description the
+            description will appear twice in the list but only the item
+            selected will be returned).</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Parent Type Id - Enter the parent type id to filter on the
+            children of the parent.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Has Table - This field is not used an can be ignored.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Description - Enter all or part of the description. Unlike
+            the case in Empl Position Type Id where only one of two or more
+            identical descriptions are returned, here all the records matching
+            the description will be returned.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Field Search Results</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Position Types - This is the Empl Position Type Id, the
+            unique identifier of the type.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Description - A user defined description of the type.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Find button: Click for a list of position types. Displays
+            the list of in the Search Results screenlet.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Delete button: Click to delete the Employee Position Type.
+            The Employee Position Type is deleted and can not be
+            restored</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2 xml:id="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionTypes">
+        <title>New Position Type</title>
+
+        <screenshot>
+          <mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata align="center"
+                         fileref="../humanres_en_images/GlobalHRSettingsPositionTypeNew.jpg"
+                         scalefit="1" width="100%"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject>
+        </screenshot>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Breadcrumbs - Human Resources &gt; Global
+        HR Settings &gt; Position Types</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Click New Position Type</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Usage:</emphasis> Create a new position
+        type.</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Fields</emphasis></para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Empl Position Type Id - A required unique identifier for the
+            Position Type. If one is not entered a numeric id will be
+            created.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Parent Type Id - Enter the Empl Position Type Id of the
+            position type that will be the parent of this entry. This will
+            form a tree structure that could be used for roll up
+            reporting.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Has Table - Field is not used and can be ignored.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Description - Required. Enter a user defined description for
+            the type.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Actions</emphasis>: Click Create to a new
+        Position Type.</para>
+
+        <para>From here you would typically click <link
+        linkend="HUMANRES_EditEmplPositionTypeRates">Position Type Rate</link>
+        on the menu and enter a rate schedule for the position.</para>
+      </sect2>
+
+      <sect2>
+        <title>Edit Position Type</title>
+
+        <screenshot>
+          <mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata align="center"
+                         fileref="../humanres_en_images/GlobalHRSettingsPositionTypeEdit.jpg"